B
RX-N600D
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
CONTENTS
FM/AM TUNING..................................................46
INTRODUCTION
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46
Manual tuning.......................................................... 47
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 48
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49
Selecting preset stations........................................... 50
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING.....................53
Selecting the Radio Data System program.............. 53
Using the Radio Data System station network ........ 54
Displaying the Radio Data System information...... 55
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING .....57
Preparing the DAB tuning ....................................... 58
DAB tuning.............................................................. 59
DAB preset tuning................................................... 60
Selecting preset DAB services................................. 62
DAB service information......................................... 63
Using DAB MENU ................................................. 64
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories.................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Front panel display .................................................... 9
Rear panel................................................................ 11
PREPARATION
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12
Placing speakers....................................................... 12
Connecting speakers................................................ 13
Information on jacks and cable plugs...................... 15
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 16
Connecting a TV...................................................... 17
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder,
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................70
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 70
Sound field program descriptions............................ 71
Changing sound field parameter settings................. 73
a VCR or an STB................................................. 18
Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck........ 20
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 21
Connecting the network........................................... 22
Connecting a multi-format player,
an external decoder or a sound processor............ 23
Connecting a game console, a video camera
ADVANCED OPERATION
or a portable audio player.................................... 23
Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 24
Connecting the DAB antenna .................................. 25
Connecting the power cable..................................... 26
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 27
Turning on and off the power .................................. 28
BASIC SETUP...................................................... 29
SET MENU............................................................79
Using SET MENU................................................... 81
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 82
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 87
3 DAB MENU ......................................................... 89
4 NET/USB MENU................................................. 90
5 OPTION MENU................................................... 92
ADVANCED SETUP............................................94
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................96
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 96
Setting the remote control code ............................... 98
Setting library codes ................................................ 99
Resetting all remote control codes......................... 100
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION...101
Connecting Zone 2................................................. 101
Controlling Zone 2................................................. 102
BASIC OPERATION
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32
USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 34
Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 34
Muting the audio output........................................... 34
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 34
Selecting the input mode ......................................... 35
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 35
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 36
Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode... 37
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38
Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo39
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 39
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 39
USING VIDEO FEATURES............................... 40
Displaying the input source information ................. 40
Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 41
Playing video sources in the background ................ 41
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 42
Enjoying multi-channel sources
®
USING iPod .......................................................104
Controlling iPod .................................................... 104
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES.............106
Navigating the network and USB menus .............. 106
Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000........ 108
Using the Internet radio ......................................... 109
Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player .... 110
RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................111
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................112
GLOSSARY.........................................................119
Audio information ................................................. 119
Video information.................................................. 121
Sound field program information .......................... 121
DAB frequency information.................................. 122
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................123
in 6.1-channel surround....................................... 42
Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 43
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 44
RECORDING ....................................................... 45
1 En
FEATURES
FEATURES
Built-in 6-channel power amplifier
Network features
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 95 W + 95 W
◆ LAN port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or
access the Internet radio via a LAN
◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
Center: 95 W
Surround: 95 W + 95 W
Surround back: 95 W
USB features
◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/
Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder
Other features
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔
S-video →component video) capability for monitor out
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes,
backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK
terminal) controlling capability
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA™
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
Radio Data System
◆ Radio Data System tuning capability
◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2
using ZONE CONTROL
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
◆ DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) tuning capability
◆ DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) information display
◆
Initial scan function to locate all DAB services in your area
◆ Tuning aid function to optimize DAB reception
iPod controlling capability
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click
and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from Digital
Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”,
“NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright
1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All
right reserved.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of
YAMAHA CORPORATION.
The “DAB Digital Radio” logo and the stylised “r” mark ® and ©
Digital One Limited.
This unit contains programs licensed under the GNU General
Public License and GNU Lesser General Public License.
Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
corporation in the United States and/or countries.
This receiver supports DAB tuning.
®
iPod
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
2 En
GETTING STARTED
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
Installing batteries in the remote
control
Remote control
AM loop antenna
1
3
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
AV
MD
SLEEP
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
DVD
TUNER
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
DVR
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
MUTE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
Indoor FM antenna
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
9
0
ENT.
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
1
Take off the battery compartment cover.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
AUDIO
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
USB
2
Insert the two supplied batteries
(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
FREQ/TEXT
MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
Indoor DAB antenna
3
Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
Batteries (2)
(AA, R6, UM-3)
Notes
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes
dim.
• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control
code that may have been cleared.
About this manual
• yindicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control.
In case the button names differ between the front panel and
the remote control, the button name on the remote control is
given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
3 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
1
3
4
5
6
7 8 9 0
A
2
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DAB
PROGRAM
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
L
USB
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
B
C
D E F G
H
I
J
K
L
M
1 MASTER ON/OFF
6 PRESET/TUNING l/ h, LEVEL
Turns on or off this unit (see page 28).
•
Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)
when this unit is in the FM/AM tuning mode. The
colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display
Selects the tuning frequency when this unit is in the
FM/AM tuning mode. The colon (:) is not displayed in
Browses through the list of stored or preset DAB
services when this unit is in the DAB tuning mode
Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using
NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input
2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode
•
•
•
Notes
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
3 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8).
•
Stores a preset station in the memory when this unit is
in the FM/AM tuning mode. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning
4 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this unit
•
Stores a preset DAB service in the memory when this
unit is in the DAB tuning mode (see page 60).
5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT
•
•
•
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
Selects the DAB service on top of the list when this
unit is in the DAB tuning mode (see page 57).
Selects the speaker channel whose output level you
want to adjust (see page 37).
4 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L), DISPLAY
E STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
•
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO
indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO
indicator is turned off) when this unit is in the FM/AM
tuning mode (see page 46).
Displays various information about the DAB service
currently being broadcast when this unit is in the DAB
tuning mode (see page 63).
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
•
F FM/AM, DAB
Switches the reception band between FM, AM and DAB
when “TUNER” is selected as the input source
9 ZONE 2 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode
G PROGRAM selector
Selects sound field programs or adjusts the bass/treble
balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
H TONE CONTROL
0 ZONE CONTROL
Switches the zone you want to control between the main
zone and Zone 2 (see page 102).
Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right
speakers in conjunction with the PROGRAM selector
y
I INPUT MODE
When Zone 2 is selected, the ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front
panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is
flashing, perform the desired operation.
Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or
sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input
signals and select the corresponding input signals when
one component is connected via both digital and analog
connections (see page 35).
A VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
y
J INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source.
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
B
PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
K MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38).
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones (see page 34).
Notes
Note
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes
priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the
front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control).
L VIDEO AUX jacks
C SPEAKERS A/B
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console, a video camera or a
portable audio player (see page 23).
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time
the corresponding button is pressed.
y
D PRESET/TUNING, EDIT, SEARCH MODE
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
•
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l/ h
between selecting preset station numbers and selecting
the tuning frequency when this unit is in the FM/AM
tuning mode.
Edits the assignments of preset stations when this unit
is in the FM/AM tuning mode (see page 51).
Switches between the five DAB tuning methods when
this unit is in the DAB tuning mode (see page 59).
Note
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
•
•
M USB port
Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
5 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Remote control
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
■ Controlling this unit
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this
unit.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate (see page 8).
Note
The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded
area below depends on the component selector switch position.
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To
control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch
to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the
input source.
2 CODE SET
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source you want to control.
1
2
0
Note
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected
input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press
any buttons on the remote control, showing which source
component is currently being operated.
A
B
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
AV
MD
SLEEP
CD
CD-R
C
D
4 Sound field program selector buttons
Select sound field programs (see page 70).
– Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
DVD
TUNER
USB
3
DOCK
V-AUX
DVR
NET
– Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and
6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources
– Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in
hi-fi stereo sound (see page 39).
E
F
AMP
SOURCE
TV
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
MUTE
5 SPEAKERS
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
G
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this
button repeatedly to toggle as follows:
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
4
5
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
A on
B on
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ENT.
H
A and B off
EFFECT
I
J
PRESET/CH
6
7
SET MENU
MENU
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
6 ENHANCER
SRCH MODE
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
ENTER
8
9
A/B/C/D/E
7 LEVEL
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
K
ON SCREEN
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
output level (see page 36).
AUDIO
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
USB
L
M
8 Cursor buttons u/ d/ j/ i, ENTER
Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or
the “SET MENU” parameters.
FREQ/TEXT
MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
9 RETURN
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
“SET MENU” parameters.
6 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
0 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
H STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
A STANDBY
Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 28).
Note
I NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 34).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
J SET MENU
Enters “SET MENU” (see page 81).
B POWER
Turns on this unit (see page 28).
K DISPLAY
Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
L Network and USB input selector buttons
Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 106).
C SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 35).
PC/MCX
Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the
sub input source of NET/USB.
D MULTI CH IN
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external
decoder, etc. (see page 38).
NET RADIO
Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of
NET/USB.
E VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
USB
Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB.
F Component selector switch
Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons
in the shaded area.
Notes
• Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source
before you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB.
AMP
Operates this unit.
SOURCE
• When you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding
sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played.
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (see page 97).
TV
M Radio Data System tuning buttons
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or
FREQ/TEXT
Switches the Radio Data System display between the
PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the
station offers the corresponding data services) and the
Notes
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and
(see page 98), priority is given to the one set for DTV/
CBL.
PTY SEEK MODE
Sets this unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 53).
PTY SEEK START
G MUTE
Starts searching for a station once the desired program
type is selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 54).
Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio
EON
Selects a program type (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or
SPORT) for automatic tuning (see page 55).
7 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
■ Controlling the TUNER
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
(FM/AM and DAB) functions
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then
press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND repeatedly to switch the reception band
between FM, AM and DAB.
456Numeric buttons
•
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when
Select preset DAB services when this unit is in the
DAB tuning mode (see page 62).
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESENING
E
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
MAN'L/AUTO FM
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
•
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
S
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
SILENT CINEMA
7 BAND
Approximately 6 m
30
30
Switches the reception band between FM, AM and DAB
C
O
D
E
S
E
T
TRANSMIT
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
A
V
MD
SLEEP
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
M
U
L
T
I
C
H
I
N
DVD
TUNER
USB
DOCK
V-AUX
DVR
NET
AMP
SOURCE
T
V
V
O
L
T
V
C
H
VOLUME
MUTE
TV
T
V
M
U
T
E
T
V
I
N
P
U
T
8 Cursor buttons u/ d/ j/ i
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
S
T
A
N
D
A
R
D
S
E
L
E
C
T
E
X
T
D
S
U
R
.
D
I
R
E
C
T
S
T
.
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
ENT
9
0
.
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
•
Press A/B/C/D/E j/ ito select a preset station group
(A to E) and PRESET/CH u/ dto select a preset
station number (1 to 8) when this unit is in the FM/AM
tuning mode (see page 50).
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLA
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
Y
ON SCREEN
AUDIO
PC/MCX
N
E
T
R
A
D
I
O
USB
FREQ/TEXT
M
O
D
E
T
S
E
E
K
S
T
A
R
T
EON
•
Press PRESET/CH u/ dto select a preset service
number when this unit is in the DAB tuning mode
Notes
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
9 DAB MEMORY
Stores a preset DAB service in the memory when this unit
is in the DAB tuning mode (see page 60).
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
J SRCH MODE
Switches between the five DAB tuning methods when this
K DISPLAY
Displays various information of the service currently
being broadcast when this unit is in the DAB tuning mode
8 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel display
1
2 3
4
5 6
7
8
9
0
A
B C D E
pNET
USB
96
24
pDVR pV-AUX pDTV/CBL pDVD pMD/CD-R pTUNER pCD
t
VOLUME
DOCK
AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY
DAB SECONDARY DRC PRESET
MATRIX DISCRETE
ENHANCER
EX qDIGITAL
PL x PL
VIRTUAL
STANDARD
SILENT CINEMA
ZONE2 NIGHT
SP
dB
HiFi DSP
PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP
A B
MUTE
96/24
DUAL
LFE
L C R
q
q
ft
q
q
PL
mS
dB
SL SB SR
PCM
F
G
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P Q
R
S
H
1 Decoder indicators
9 AUTO indicator
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit functions.
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode
2 ENHANCER indicator
0 TUNED indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (see page 37).
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station
3 Sound field indicators
A STEREO indicator
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
•
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for
an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit
Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo DAB
service.
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
•
Surround left
DSP sound field
Surround right
DSP sound field
B MEMORY indicator
Surround back DSP sound field
Flashes to show that a station or a DAB service can be
4 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
C DAB indicators
Indicate the current DAB tuning status when this unit is in
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
D VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
E DUAL indicator
6 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when dual monaural signals are being input to
this unit when this unit is in the DAB tuning mode.
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 34).
F PCM indicator
7 DOCK indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit
G STANDARD indicator
Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR.
ENHANCED” program is selected.
8 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
H SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
9 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
I Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
J ZONE2 indicator
K NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode
L HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
M Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
N Radio Data System indicators
The corresponding indicator lights up to show the type
of the Radio Data System information.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
O SLEEP indicator
P MUTE indicator
Q 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
R Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
S LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
10 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Rear panel
1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
0
AUDIO
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUT
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
DIGITAL INPUT
DOCK
LAN
OUTPUT
CENTER
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVD
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
IN
(PLAY)
MD/ OUT
CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
CD
FRONT
SURROUND
ZONE
2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
(REC)
DVD
DVR
DTV/
CBL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
DAB
UNBAL.
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DTV/CBL
VIDEO
DVR
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
75
Ω
COMPONENT VIDEO
TUNER
SPEAKERS
FM ANT
75Ω
FRONT
SURROUND
AM
ANT
GND
UNBAL.
AC OUTLET
A
SWITCHED
REMOTE
IN
CONTROL
OUT
+12V
OUT 15mA MAX.
B
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
A
B C
D
E
F
1 Video component jacks
9 LAN port
See pages 17 and 18 for connection information.
Use to connect a network cable for network connections.
See page 22 for connection information.
2 Audio component jacks
0 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
See page 20 for connection information.
3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
A REMOTE jacks
See page 23 for connection information.
4 ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks
B CONTROL OUT jack
This is a control expansion terminal for custom
installation.
See page 101 for connection information.
Note
These jacks output analog signals only.
C Antenna terminals
See page 24 for connection information.
5 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
See page 13 for connection information.
D Speaker terminals
See page 13 for connection information.
6 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
See page 20 for connection information.
E DAB antenna terminal
See page 25 for connection information.
7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 18 and 20 for connection information.
F AC OUTLET (SWITCHED)
Use to supply power to your other audiovisual
components.
8 DOCK terminal
Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be
stationed.
See page 26 for details.
See page 21 for connection information.
11 En
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
Placing speakers
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
*
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
*
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union).
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the
center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as
close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or
under it.
FL
FR
C
30˚
SL
SL
SR
SR
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
60˚
80˚
SB
Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back speaker supplements the surround
speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening
position and at the same height as the surround speakers.
FR
SL
SW
FL
SR
Subwoofer (SW)
C
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass
frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high
fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The
position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low
bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to
place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall
reflections.
SB
1.8 m (6 ft)
12 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be
unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
•
•
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this
unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.
•
•
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the
monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.
Note
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,
groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable
to the “–” (black) terminals.
Front speakers (A)
Right
Left
Surround speakers
Subwoofer
Right
Left
1
2
4
5
7
OUTPUT
SUB
WOOFER
SPEAKERS
FRONT
SURROUND
A
B
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
3
6
Front
speakers
(B)
Center
speaker
Surround back
speaker
13 En
CONNECTIONS
FRONT terminals
■ Connecting the speaker cable
Connect one or two sets of front speakers (1, 2) to these
terminals. If you use only one front speaker system,
connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal.
1
Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then
twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.
10 mm
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System) to this jack.
2
Loosen the knob.
1
7
4
2
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
5
6
3
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
Speaker layout
4
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
14 En
CONNECTIONS
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs
Video jacks and cable plugs
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
OPTICAL
AUDIO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
Y
P
B
PR
L
R
(White)
(Red)
(Orange)
(Yellow)
(Green) (Blue) (Red)
S
O
V
PB
PR
Y
L
R
C
Left and right
analog audio digital audio
cable plugs
Coaxial
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
cable plug
■ Audio jacks
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
AUDIO jacks
VIDEO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
Notes
y
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks are converted and
output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks interchangeably.
• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the
fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not
using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This
cap protects the jack from dust.
15 En
CONNECTIONS
Audio and video signal flow
■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC)
Input
Output
AUDIO OUT (REC)
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
Digital audio
Analog audio
DIGITAL AUDIO
OPTICAL
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
Digital output
Analog output
Note
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
Input
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Y
P
B
PR
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Analog video
S VIDEO
VIDEO
Through
Note
If video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks simultaneously when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to
“ON”, the priority order of the input signals is as follows:
COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO
16 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a TV
Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
S
Y
PB
PR
V
S-video in
Component video in
Video in
TV
17 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB
Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those
made for your TV (see page 17). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB.
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Notes
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 92), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV
(see page 17). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other
components to the VIDEO jacks.
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 92), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When
recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is
given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
■ Connecting a DVD player
DVD player
Audio out
Component video out
R
L
C
O
V
Y
PB
PR
S
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
DVD
DVD
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
DVD
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
18 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR
AUDIO
Y
PB
PR
DVR
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
DVR
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
S
S
V
V
Y
PB
PR
R
L
R
L
Component video out
DVD recorder or
VCR
■ Connecting an STB
Cable TV receiver or
satellite receiver
Component video out
R
L
O
V
Y
PB
PR
S
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
DTV/CBL
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
DTV/
CBL
DTV/CBL
VIDEO
DTV/CBL
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
19 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck
Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections.
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Note
To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”
CD player
Audio out
R
L
AUDIO
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
MD/ OUT
(REC)
CD
CD-R
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
O
R
L
R
L
Audio in
Audio out
MD recorder or
tape deck
20 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the
supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK
terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the
YAMAHA iPod universal dock.
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Notes
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
• Do not connect any iPod accessories (such as headphones, a wired remote control, or an FM transmitter) to your iPod when it is
stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately).
• Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of
this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod.
• Unless your iPod is firmly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, audio and/or video signals may not be output properly.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the
front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 116.
• Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on.
• Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such
as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod.
iPod
YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10 sold separately)
DOCK
21 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the network
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the LAN port
of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected
to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access
the Internet radio, each device must be connected properly in the network.
Note
If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 90).
YAMAHA MCX-2000
YAMAHA MCX-C15
Internet
WAN
LAN
YAMAHA MCX-A10
(with optional
speakers)
PC
Modem
Router
Network cable
LAN
22 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a multi-format player,
an external decoder or a sound
processor
Connecting a game console, a
video camera or a portable audio
player
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a
multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player,
external decoder or sound processor to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output
jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and
surround channels.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to
this unit.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and
other components before making connections.
Note
CAUTION
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal takes priority over
the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
Do not connect this unit or other components to
the AC power supply until all connections
between components are complete.
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
Notes
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
MAN'L/AUTO FM
NEXT
LEVEL
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot select sound field programs.
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We
recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker
system before using this feature.
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
VIDEO
L
R
• When headphones are used, only the signals input at the
FRONT L/R jacks are output at the PHONES jack.
V
L
R
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND
Game console,
video camera or
portable audio player
L
R
L
R
Multi-format player,
external decoder or
sound processor
23 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
2
3
Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT
terminal.
Notes
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT terminal.
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Indoor FM antenna
(supplied)
TUNER
FM ANT
AM
ANT
75Ω
GND
UNBAL.
4
Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back
into place.
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and
minimum interference,
connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground
is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m of vinyl-covered wire
extended from a window.
5
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the
other lead wire to the GND terminal.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
Set up the AM loop antenna.
y
Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this
unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you
tune into AM stations.
1
24 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the DAB antenna
Connect the supplied indoor DAB antenna to the DAB
antenna terminal on the rear panel and attach the indoor
DAB antenna vertically on the wall.
DAB
UNBAL.
75
Ω
Indoor DAB antenna
(supplied)
y
It is recommended that you use the tuning aid function (see
page 66) when you set up the indoor DAB antenna in order to
maximize DAB reception capability.
Notes
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all
areas are currently being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB
statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDAB
online at “http://www.worlddab.org/”.
If the DAB signal is weak, use a commercially available outdoor
DAB antenna for better reception.
25 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the power cable
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
AC OUTLETS
AC OUTLETS
To the AC wall outlet
■ AC OUTLET (SWITCHED)
Use this outlet to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of another
component to this outlet. Power to this outlet is supplied
when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on. However,
power to this outlet is cut off when the main zone and
Zone 2 are turned off or when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed and released outward to the OFF
position. For information on the maximum power, see
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
26 En
CONNECTIONS
Setting the speaker impedance
CAUTION
4
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4
ohm speakers can be also used as the front
speakers.
STRAIGHT
2,5
EFFECT
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
SP IMP.-6 MIN
5
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
2,4 3
1
2
Make sure this unit is turned off.
See page 28 for details about turning on or off this
unit.
MASTER
ON
OFF
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
Note
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.
While holding
down
MASTER
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
ON
OFF
3
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “SP IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
PROGRAM
SP IMP.-8 MIN
27 En
CONNECTIONS
Turning on and off the power
When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.
MASTER ON/OFF
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
STANDBY
POWER
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
AV
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MD
SLEEP
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
DVD
TUNER
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
PROGRAM
INPUT
DVR
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
AMP
SOURCE
TV
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
■ Turning on this unit
■ Turning off this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward
to the ON position to turn on this unit.
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off
this unit.
MASTER
MASTER
ON
OFF
Front panel
ON
OFF
Front panel
•
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or
STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main zone
to the standby mode.
MAIN ZONE
STANDBY
ON/OFF
or
Front panel
Remote control
•
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or
POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main
zone.
MAIN ZONE
POWER
or
ON/OFF
Front panel
Remote control
Note
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and
STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when
MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
y
28 En
BASIC SETUP
BASIC SETUP
The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort.
Notes
• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.
• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see
page 82).
• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 82).
• Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
• Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
4
Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.
The following display appears in the OSD.
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
AV
5
6
7
8
MD
SLEEP
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
CD
CD-R
9
0
ENT.
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
DVD
TUNER
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
PRESET/CH
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
2,13
3-12
SRCH MODE
DVR
;BASIC SETUP
ENTER
AMP
SOURCE
TV
1
A/B/C/D/E
.ꢀROOM:
S >M
L
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
ꢀꢀSUBWOOFER;;;;YES
ꢀꢀSPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
ON SCREEN
ENTER
AUDIO
A/B/C/D/E
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
1
2
Set the component selector switch to AMP.
5
Press u/ dto select “ROOM” and then j/ i
to select the desired setting.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
.ꢀROOM:
S >M
L
ꢀꢀSUBWOOFER;;;;YES
ꢀꢀSPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
Select the size of the room where you have installed
your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined
as follows:
ꢀꢀSET MENU
.ꢀ;BASICꢀSETUP
ꢀ;MANUALꢀSETUP
.ꢀ;SIGNAL INFO
SET MENU
MENU
Choices: S, M, L
SRCH MODE
ꢀꢀ[ ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
2
S (small)
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m
L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m
3.6 x 2.8m, 10m
2
2
3
Press u/ dto select “BASIC SETUP”.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
29 En
BASIC SETUP
6
Press dto select “SUBWOOFER” and then
j/ ito select the desired setting.
8
Press dto select “SETUP” and then j/ ito
select the desired setting.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ꢀROOM: S >M
.ꢀSUBWOOFER;;;;YES
ꢀꢀSPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
;BASIC SETUP
L
ꢀROOM:
S >M
L
ꢀSUBWOOFER;;;;YES
ꢀSPEAKERS;;;;6spk
. SETUP:>OK CANCEL
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
Choices: YES, NONE
Choices: OK, CANCEL
• Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your
system.
• Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in
your system.
• Select “OK” to apply the settings you made.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure
without making any changes.
y
You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup
procedure.
7
Press dto select “SPEAKERS” and then j/ i
to select the number of speakers connected
to this unit.
9
Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ꢀROOM:
S >M
L
ꢀSUBWOOFER;;;;YES
.ꢀSPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
If you selected “OK” in step 8, each speaker outputs a
test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears
in the OSD for a few seconds and then “CHECK
OK?” appears in the OSD.
Choice Display
Speakers
Front L/R
2spk
SL SB SR
;BASIC SETUP
ꢀROOM: S >M
ꢀꢀSUBWOOFER;;;;YES
ꢀꢀSPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
.ꢀCHECK:Test Tone
;BASIC SETUP
ꢀROOM: S >M
ꢀꢀSUBWOOFER;;;;YES
ꢀꢀSPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
.ꢀCHECK OK?;;;;YES
L
L
L C R
3spk
Front L/R, Center
SL SB SR
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
L C R
SL SB SR
Front L/R, Surround L/R
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
4spk
y
“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 7, if necessary.
L C R
5spk
SL SB SR
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround back
L C R
6spk
SL SB SR
30 En
BASIC SETUP
10 Press j/ ito select the desired setting.
12 Press u/ dto select a speaker and then j/ i
to adjust the balance.
PRESET/CH
The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the
surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.
• Press ito increase the value.
;BASIC SETUP
ꢀROOM:
S >M
L
ꢀꢀSUBWOOFER;;;;YES
ꢀꢀSPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
.ꢀCHECK OK?;;;;YES
ENTER
• Press jto decrease the value.
A/B/C/D/E
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ-__________+
ꢀꢀ.ꢀꢀꢀFR;;;;;;;;;;
Choices: YES, NO
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ C;;;;;;;;;;
ENTER
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀSL;;;;;;;;;;
• Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if
the test tone levels from each speaker were
satisfactory.
A/B/C/D/E
• Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level
adjustment menu in step 12 to balance the output
level of each speaker.
• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front
left and right speakers.
• Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front
left and center speakers.
• Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front
left and surround left speakers.
11 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
PRESET/CH
• Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround back speakers.
• Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround right speakers.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the
front left speaker and the subwoofer.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
• If you selected “YES” in step 10, the setup
procedure is completed and the display returns to
the top “SET MENU” display.
• If you selected “NO” in step 10, the speaker level
adjustment display appears in the front panel
display.
13 Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC
SETUP”.
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
31 En
PLAYBACK
PLAYBACK
CAUTION
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.
3
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
MD
SLEEP
INPUT
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
or
DVD
TUNER
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
2
6,7 6
3
5
DVR
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
Front panel
Remote control
7
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
AV
5
6
7
8
MD
SLEEP
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for
a few seconds.
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
CD
CD-R
9
0
ENT.
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
2
5
EFFECT
DVD
TUNER
PRESET/CH
3
2
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
DVR
SRCH MODE
ENTER
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A/B/C/D/E
Available input sources
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
MUTE
ON SCREEN
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
L
R
DVD AUTO
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Currently selected
input mode
Currently selected
input source
Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the
remote control repeatedly) to turn on the set
of front speakers you want to use.
Notes
• To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, connect the
source component via digital connection and set the input
mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” (see page 35).
Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the
respective set of front speakers are turned on or off.
4
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
SPEAKERS
A
B
Front panel
or
instructions.
instructions.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
SPEAKERS
9
Remote control
32 En
PLAYBACK
5
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
7
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel (or press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote
control repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
VOLUME
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and in the OSD.
See page 71 for details about sound field programs.
or
VOLUME
PROGRAM
Remote control
Front panel
6
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS”
and then rotate the PROGRAM selector to
adjust the corresponding frequency
response level.
Front panel
or
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
TONE CONTROL
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ENT.
EFFECT
Remote control
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
L
R
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
TREBLE
0dB
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency
response.
L
R
TV Sports
• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency
response.
Currently selected
sound field program
Notes
Notes
• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored
independently.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source (see page 38).
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS
96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound
field programs are applied.
• To display information about the currently selected input
• When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 86),
and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output
automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this
unit.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the front speakers may not match that of the other
speakers.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
33 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Using SILENT CINEMA
Selecting the night listening mode
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to a source with a
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see
page 71). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on
the type of material you are playing.
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press NIGHT on the remote control
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Notes
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT
AMP
NIGHT
SOURCE
10
TV
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
Muting the audio output
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the
audio output.
y
MUTE
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
y
2
Press j/ ion the remote control to adjust the
effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front
panel display.
• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME
+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE”
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 86).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
PRESET/CH
Note
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
If you change the input source or the sound field program with the
remote control while the audio output is being muted, this unit
resumes the audio output.
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
34 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
y
AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1) Digital signals
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
(2) Analog signals
Notes
DTS
Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following
cases:
selected.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 38).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The effectiveness of the night listening modes may vary
depending on the input source and surround sound settings
you use.
ANALOG
Note
When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit
automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal is detected.
Using the sleep timer
Selecting the input mode
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
y
• We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most
cases.
connected to AC OUTLET (SWITCHED) (see page 26).
• You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the
“INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 88).
1
Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the desired input
source.
Notes
• To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”.
• DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on
the player even if you make a digital connection between this
unit and the player.
MD
SLEEP
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
DVD
TUNER
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
DVR
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
to select the desired input source.
2
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
INPUT
Press INPUT MODE on the front panel
repeatedly to select the desired input mode.
INPUT MODE
Available input sources
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
L
R
DVD AUTO
Currently selected
input mode
Currently selected
input source
35 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Adjusting the speaker level
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
3
Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
SLEEP
Note
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
AMP
SLEEP 120min
SLEEP 90min
1
SOURCE
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV
SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP 60min
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front
panel display, and the display returns to the selected
sound field program.
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
9
0
ENT.
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
1
SRCH MODE
3
2
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R
TUNER pCD
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
dB
AUDIO
SP
A
SLEEP
L
R
SLEEP 120min
Flashes
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press LEVEL on the remote control
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R
TUNER pCD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
SLEEP
L
R
STRAIGHT
AMP
Lights up
LEVEL
SOURCE
TITLE
TV
BAND
4
To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on
the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP
OFF” appears in the front panel display.
• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker
output level.
• Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker
output level.
SLEEP
• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker
output level.
• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right
speaker output level.
• Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back
speaker output level.
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R
TUNER pCD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker
output level.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output
level.
L
R
SLEEP OFF
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also
select the speaker by pressing u/ d.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on
the remote control) to set the main zone to the standby
mode.
36 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
2
Press j/ ion the remote control to adjust the
speaker output level.
• Press ito increase the value.
Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are
created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is
resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that
are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The
Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances
your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened
complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as
well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass
is compensated, providing the improved performance of
the overall sound system.
• Press jto decrease the value.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
y
This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on
the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to
select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust
and then press LEVEL on the front panel to adjust the output
level.
Notes
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the
PCM signals (48 kHz), the analog 2-channel input sources and
the music data input at the USB port or the LAN port.
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with
any of the sound field programs.
• When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while
an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not
Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD.
• When the input source is changed to an incompatible input
source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned
on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically
turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in
2-channel or 6-channel stereo.
y
The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display
when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected.
37 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
source.
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press ENHANCER on the remote
control repeatedly to select the desired
Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
The following display appears in the OSD and the
ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that
“MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel
display.
AMP
ENHANCER
SOURCE
0
TV
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel
Remote control
MUSIC ENHANCER
.
2ch Enhancer
LOW >HIGH
ENHANCER
Lights up
MULTI CH INPUT
Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 6ch Enhancer,
Off (previously selected sound field
program)
• Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 2-channel stereo.
• Select “6ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 6-channel stereo.
• Select Off (previously selected sound field
program) to turn off the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode.
Note
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,
no other source can be played. To select another input source with
the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector
buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the
front panel display.
y
You can also switch between “2ch Enhancer” and “6ch
Enhancer” by pressing j/ ion the remote control when the
arrow is located on the left of “2ch Enhancer” or “6ch
Enhancer” in the OSD.
2
Press donce and then j/ ion the remote
control to select the desired effect level.
PRESET/CH
MUSIC ENHANCER
2ch Enhancer
.
LOW
>HIGH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Choices: HIGH, LOW
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
Note
Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the
characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set
the effect level to “LOW”.
38 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound
The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass
the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you
can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and
analog sources.
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press STEREO on the remote control
repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to
select “DIRECT STEREO”.
AMP
STEREO
AMP
SOURCE
1
DIRECT ST.
SOURCE
TV
8
TV
2ch Stereo
DIRECT STEREO
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 83).
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
Notes
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS
when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
no sound will be output.
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
page 82) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not
effective.
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
• The front panel display automatically dims.
y
You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by rotating the
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press STRAIGHT on the remote
control to select “STRAIGHT”.
AMP
STRAIGHT
SOURCE
ENT.
TV
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
2
To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press
STRAIGHT on the remote control again so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front
panel display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
y
You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing
STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel.
39 En
USING VIDEO FEATURES
USING VIDEO FEATURES
Signal format FORMAT
Displaying the input source
information
Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to analog
input.
Display status: Analog, Digital, DolbyD, DTS, MP3,
PCM, WMA, ---
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
Note
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU on the remote
control.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.
Sampling frequency SAMPLING
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
Display status: 8kHz, 11kHz, 12kHz, 16kHz,
22.05kHz, 24kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz,
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, ---
SRCH MODE
TV
Note
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling
frequency.
ꢀꢀSET MENU
.ꢀ;BASICꢀSETUP
ꢀ;MANUALꢀSETUP
.ꢀ;SIGNAL INFO
Channel CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround
channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
ꢀꢀ[ ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
Note
2
Press drepeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO”
and then press ENTER.
“---” appears when there is no source channel available.
The following information about the input source
appears in the OSD.
Bit rate BITRATE
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Note
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.
ENTER
ENTER
Flag FLAG
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch
decoders.
;SIGNAL INFO
3
Press SET MENU on the remote control again
to exit from “SET MENU”.
FORMAT
PCM
ꢀꢀSAMPLING
ꢀꢀCHANNEL 2/0/---
ꢀꢀBITRATE ---
ꢀꢀFLAG NONE
ꢀꢀ [RETURN]:Exit
ꢀꢀ
48kHz
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
40 En
USING VIDEO FEATURES
y
You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is not
video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION
MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 92).
Selecting the OSD mode
You can display the operating information of this unit on a
video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound
field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is
much easier to see the available options and parameters
than it is to read the information in the front panel display.
Notes
• The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT jacks and will
not be recorded.
• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON”
• To display the OSD with the component video signals output at
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, set the
OSD mode to the full display mode.
• When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “OFF”
depending on the conditions of the picture.
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press DISPLAY on the remote
control repeatedly to toggle between the
OSD modes.
Playing video sources in the
background
The OSD mode changes in the following order.
AMP
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
SOURCE
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
TV
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
Full display
MD
SLEEP
Short display
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
DVD
TUNER
Audio sources
Video sources
Display off
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
DVR
Full display
Fully shows the sound field program parameter
settings as well as the contents of the front panel
display.
y
If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source
Short display
Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display
at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this
unit.
Display off
No information is displayed except for the “SET
MENU” screen.
P02
.ꢀ
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;21ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;25ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
P02
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
Full display
Short display
41 En
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Decoders
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
6.1-channel surround
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the source you are playing.
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or
DTS-ES decoders.
Decoder
Functions
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx
music decoder.
PLIIxMusic
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital
EX or DTS-ES decoder.
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote
control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and
6.1-channel playback.
EX/ES
EX
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital
EX decoder.
AMP
EXTD SUR.
SOURCE
7
Off OFF
TV
Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.
Notes
2
Press j/ irepeatedly to select a decoder
while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed.
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag
that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing
these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually
from “PLIIxMusic”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.
PRESET/CH
• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD
SUR. in the following cases:
ENTER
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
A/B/C/D/E
Auto AUTO
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
(see page 39) mode is selected.
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to
“AUTO”.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is
When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is
input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back
the signal in 6.1 channels.
If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present
in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1
channels.
42 En
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Enjoying 2-channel sources in
surround
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
SUR. STANDARD
Functions
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Movie
PLII Music
PLII Game
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press STANDARD on the remote
control repeatedly to switch between the
“SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED”
programs or press MOVIE to select the
“MOVIE THEATER” program.
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
music sources
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
game sources
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Movie
PLIIx Music
PLIIx Game
STANDARD
5
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
music sources
AMP
SOURCE
or
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
game sources
TV
MOVIE
4
DTS processing for movie sources
DTS processing for music sources
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
2
Press SELECT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
or
Functions
MOVIE THEATER
SELECT
6
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PRO LOGIC
You can select from the following modes depending
on the type of source you are playing and your
personal preference.
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Movie
Neo:6 Cinema
y
You can also select a decoder by pressing j/ ion the remote
control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel
display.
DTS processing for movie sources
Note
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is
43 En
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see
Note
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
selected.
44 En
RECORDING
RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
CAUTION
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in
noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs
(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
Notes
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 33), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 84) and the sound field programs (see
page 71) do not affect the recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
1
2
Turn on all the connected components.
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the source
component you want to record from.
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
MAN'L/AUTO FM
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
MD
SLEEP
INPUT
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
2
or
DVD
TUNER
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
DVR
AV
MD
SLEEP
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
DVD
TUNER
2
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
DVR
AMP
SOURCE
TV
3
4
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
Start recording on the recording component.
45 En
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM TUNING
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Note
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
Automatic tuning
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
3
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
DISPLAY
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
VOLUME
dB
AUTO TUNED
EFFECT
SP
SILENT CINEMA
A
L
R
A AM 1440 kHz
No colon (:)
Lights up
3 2
4
1
3
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
INPUT
SEARCH MODE
4
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ honce to begin
automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
• Press hto tune into a higher frequency.
• Press lto tune into a lower frequency.
Front panel
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
FM/AM
or
FM
AM
l
PRESET/TUNING h
DAB
LEVEL
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
AUTO TUNED
SP
A
L
R
A AM 1530 kHz
Lights up
46 En
FM/AM TUNING
Manual tuning
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
3
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
Note
DISPLAY
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
L
R
A AM 1440 kHz
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
No colon (:)
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
3 2
4
1
3
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
4
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hto tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue searching.
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
Front panel
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
FM/AM
or
FM
AM
DAB
47 En
FM/AM TUNING
Automatic preset tuning
3
Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
Flash
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
VOLUME
dB
AUTO TUNED
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
SP
A
L
R
A1:FM 87.50MHz
2
1 3
Flashes
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
y
• You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores
FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. For
details, see “Automatic preset tuning options” on page 49.
INPUT
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for
all the available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 49.
• Only radio data system stations are stored automatically by
automatic preset tuning.
Front panel
Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
FM/AM
FM
DAB
48 En
FM/AM TUNING
■ Automatic preset tuning options
You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower
frequencies.
Manual preset tuning
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
Note
First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on
•
Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING
l/ hto select the preset station number
under which the first station will be stored.
Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all
been stored up to E8.
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
MAN'L/AUTO FM
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING h
NEXT
LEVEL
3 4
2,5
1
Tune into a station automatically or manually.
•
Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:)
disappears from the front panel display and
then press PRESET/TUNING lto begin tuning
toward lower frequencies.
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
PRESET/TUNING
l
PRESET/TUNING h
EDIT
A AM 630 kHz
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel
display shows the frequency of the station received.
2
3
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
A/B/C/D/E
NEXT
Flashes
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
C :AM 630 kHz
Preset station
Colon (:)
group
49 En
FM/AM TUNING
Selecting preset stations
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
4
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hto select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
• Press hto select a higher preset station number.
• Press lto select a lower preset station number.
l
PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
Flashes
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
TUNED
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
L
R
C3:AM 630 kHz
1 2
Preset station number
STEREO
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
4
1
3
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
5
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
9
0
ENT.
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
1
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
2
ON SCREEN
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the
component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER
to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1
Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or
A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select
the desired preset station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
C3:AM 630 kHz
The displayed station has been stored as C3.
6
Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other
stations.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
Notes
NEXT
or
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
Remote control
Front panel
50 En
FM/AM TUNING
Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
2
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hon the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control) to select the desired preset station
number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
l
PRESET/TUNING h
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
LEVEL
or
ENTER
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
A/B/C/D/E
Remote control
Front panel
2,4
1,3
1
2
Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l/ h.
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
E1:FM 87.50MHz
Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
Flashes
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
E1:FM 87.50MHz
Flashes
51 En
FM/AM TUNING
3
Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l/ h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING h
NEXT
LEVEL
Flashes
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
A5:FM 90.60MHz
Flashes
4
Press EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
EDIT E1-A5
52 En
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
Radio Data System (Europe model only) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The Radio
Data System function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data
such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other
networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.
Selecting the Radio Data System
program
Use this feature to select one of the 15 Radio Data System
program types and search for all the available preset
stations of the selected program type.
3
Press PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control to select the desired program type.
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
PRESET/CH
ENT.
EFFECT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
PRESET/CH
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
ENTER
POP M
SRCH MODE
AV
3
4
A/B/C/D/E
MD
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
CD
CD-R
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
1
ON SCREEN
DVD
TUNER
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
AUDIO
Lights up
PC/MCX NET RADIO
USB
DVR
2
AMP
SOURCE
TV
FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
Program type
Descriptions
News
NEWS
1
2
Press TUNER on the remote control to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
Current affairs
General information
Sports
AFFAIRS
INFO
TUNER
SPORT
Education
EDUCATE
DRAMA
Drama
Press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote
control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK
mode.
The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in
the front panel display.
Culture
CULTURE
SCIENCE
VARIED
POP M
Science
Light entertainment
Popular music
Rock music
NEWS
MODE PTEK START
ROCK M
Middle-of-the-road music (easy-
listening)
M.O.R. M
Flashes
y
Light classics
Serious classics
Other music
LIGHT M
CLASSICS
OTHER M
To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE
on the remote control again.
53 En
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
Using the Radio Data System
station network
4
Press PTY SEEK START on the remote
control to start searching for all the available
Radio Data System preset stations.
Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other
networks) data service of the Radio Data System station
network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this
unit automatically searches for all the available preset
stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data
service of the selected program type for a certain duration
of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this
unit automatically switches to the local station
The name of the selected program type flashes and
the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel
display while this unit is searching for stations.
MODE PTY SEEK START
broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back
to the nationwide station once the EON data service ends.
PTY HOLD
POP M
Notes
• You can use this feature only when the EON data service is
available.
Flashes
Lights up
• The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only
when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data
System station.
y
To stop searching for stations, press PTY SEEK START on
the remote control again.
ENT.
EFFECT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
Notes
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
SRCH MODE
AV
ENTER
MD
SLEEP
• This unit stops searching for stations when a station
broadcasting the selected program type is found.
• If the station found is not the one you desire, press PTY
SEEK START again to resume searching for another
station broadcasting the same program type.
A/B/C/D/E
CD
CD-R
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
1
ON SCREEN
DVD
TUNER
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
AUDIO
PC/MCX NET RADIO
USB
DVR
3
AMP
SOURCE
TV
FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
1
2
Press TUNER on the remote control to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
TUNER
Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel
display, select another Radio Data System program so
that the EON indicator lights up.
54 En
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
Displaying the Radio Data System
information
Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data
System information: PS (program service), PTY (program
type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The
corresponding indicators light up in the front panel
display.
3
Press EON on the remote control repeatedly
to select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or
SPORT).
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
Notes
NEWS
EON
• You can select one of the Radio Data System modes only when
the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the
front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive
all of the Radio Data System data from the station.
• You can select only the available Radio Data System modes
being offered by the station.
• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit
may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In
particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and
may not be available even when the other Radio Data System
modes are available.
Lights up
y
To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control
repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears
and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display.
• In case of poor reception conditions, press TUNING MODE
(AUTO/MAN’L) on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while
this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception
may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front
panel display.
• When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the
program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters
are displayed with the “_” (underscore).
• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
ENT.
EFFECT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
PRESET/CH
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
SRCH MODE
AV
MD
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
CD
CD-R
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
1
ON SCREEN
DVD
TUNER
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
AUDIO
PC/MCX NET RADIO
USB
DVR
2
AMP
SOURCE
TV
FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
1
Press TUNER on the remote control to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
TUNER
55 En
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
2
Press FREQ/TEXT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data
System display mode.
FREQ/TEXT
PS
PTY
RT
CT
Frequency display
• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “RT” to display the information on the
Radio Data System program currently being
received.
• Select “CT” to display the current time.
56 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting), also known as digital radio, is a new way of radio broadcasting. DAB is broadcast
using digital signals instead of analog signals, resulting in near CD-quality sound. Analog signals (i.e. AM/FM) are
susceptible to interference (i.e. distorting and noise) caused by electrical equipment, weather conditions, tall buildings,
mountains, etc. whereas digital signals are not. Thus, with DAB, there is virtually interference-free reception and no hiss
or crackle.
Another advantage of DAB is that a large amount of information can be carried within the digital signal. DAB is
broadcast in blocks of data called ensembles (also known as multiplexes). Several radio programs called services can be
broadcast simultaneously in each ensemble. This means that you can choose between several radio programs within one
frequency.
In addition to the audio signal, service information is also broadcast and displayed in the front panel display of this unit.
Part of the service information is text data information called Dynamic Label Segment (DLS). For more information, see
With DAB, there is no need to remember channel frequencies. All broadcasts are selected by simply selecting the service
name.
Notes
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all
Ensemble
areas are currently being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB
statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDAB
online at “http://www.worlddab.org/”.
• The sound quality and service information are controlled by the
DAB broadcaster, not this unit. Not all DAB broadcasters
transmit service information.
• DAB signals are broadcast in Band-III (174 – 240 MHz) and
L-Band (1452 – 1492 MHz). This unit is able to receive both
bands.
Service
Audio signal
and
service information
57 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
y
When you have already performed the initial scan before
you set this unit to the DAB tuning mode for the first time,
“Initiate Scan” does not appear in the front panel display.
operation.
Preparing the DAB tuning
Before tuning into DAB services, you must perform the
initial scan.
3
Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or u/ d
/ j/ ion the remote control) to start the initial
scan operation.
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
This unit starts the scan for DAB ensembles. While
the scan is in progress, “Scanning” and the
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
percentage of the progress of the scan appear in the
front panel display. When this unit completes the
scan, “FINISH” and the number of receivable DAB
services appear in the front panel display, and then
this unit enters the DAB tuning mode automatically.
2 3
1
ENT.
EFFECT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
PRESET/CH
ENTER
LEVEL
SET MENU
TITLE
BAND
MENU
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
2
SRCH MODE
AV
PRESET/CH
MD
SLEEP
3
A/B/C/D/E
CD
DVD
CD-R
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
A/B/C/D/E
TUNER
AUDIO
1
DISC SKIP
V-AUX
DVR
or
NEXT
ENTER
AMP
SOURCE
TV
FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
A/B/C/D/E
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
Front panel
Remote control
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
SOURCE, and then press TUNER on the
remote control) to select “TUNER” as the
input source.
Scanning 30%
INPUT
or
TUNER
FINISH [015]
Front panel
Remote control
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
SP
A
2
Press DAB on the front panel (or BAND on
the remote control) repeatedly to select DAB
as the reception band.
L
R
PCM
Classic FM
The DAB indicator lights up in the front panel
display. When you did not perform the initial scan,
“Initiate Scan” appears in the front panel display.
Notes
• If the initial scan operation is not successful, “Not
Available” appears in the front panel display. You can start
the initial scan again by pressing A/B/C/D/E on the front
panel (or u/ d / j/ ion the remote control). When you
want to exit the DAB tuning mode, press BAND on the
remote control to select the other bands.
FM/AM
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
or
DAB
Remote control
Front panel
• For further details about problems and their proper
Lights up
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
SP
A
L
R
PCM
Initiate Scan
58 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
FM/AM
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
DAB tuning
There are five DAB tuning methods:
or
DAB
“ALPHANUMERIC”, “ACTIVE”, “ENSEMBLE”,
“FAVOURITE”, and “PRESET”. You can select the
desired services with the channel labels displayed in the
front panel display.
Front panel
Remote control
DAB
Note
Once you have performed the initial scan, the registry list of
available services is updated automatically as long as this unit is
in the DAB tuning mode. To register new ensembles, perform the
initial scan again (see pages 65).
Lights up
3
Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select the desired DAB tuning
method.
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
ALPHANUMERIC
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
ACTIVE
3 2
4
2
1
Front panel
ENT.
EFFECT
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
PRESET/CH
ENTER
LEVEL
SET MENU
TITLE
BAND
MENU
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
STANDBY
POWER
3
4
SRCH MODE
or
ENSEMBLE
MD
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
CD
DVD
CD-R
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
TUNER
SET MENU
AUDIO
1
DISC SKIP
V-AUX
DVR
MENU
FAVOURITE
SRCH MODE
AMP
FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
SOURCE
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV
Remote control
PRESET
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press TUNER on the remote control) to
select “TUNER” as the input source.
• Select “ALPHANUMERIC” to browse through all
of the registered DAB services in the alphanumeric
order.
INPUT
• Select “ACTIVE” to browse through all of the
receivable DAB services in the alphabetical order.
• Select “ENSEMBLE” to browse through the
registered DAB services from the lowest to the
highest channel labels.
or
TUNER
Front panel
Remote control
• Select “FAVOURITE” to browse through the top
10 services most frequently selected with this unit.
• Select “PRESET” to tune into preset DAB services
by entering the corresponding preset service
number. When you select “PRESET”, the PRESET
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2
Press DAB on the front panel (or BAND on
the remote control) repeatedly to select
“DAB” as the reception band.
The DAB indicator lights up in the front panel display
while this unit is in the DAB tuning mode.
Note
For details about tuning into preset DAB services, see
59 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
DAB preset tuning
You can use the DAB preset tuning feature to store preset
DAB services in the memory. You can then recall any
preset service easily by selecting the preset service
number assigned to the corresponding DAB service.
4
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hon the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control) repeatedly to search for registered
DAB services.
PRESET/CH
l
PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
or
ENTER
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
A/B/C/D/E
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
Front panel
Remote control
SILENT CINEMA
y
To return to the top of the list, press A/B/C/D/E on the front
panel (or j/ ion the remote control).
3
2,4
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
Notes
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
• The SECONDARY indicator lights up in the front panel
display when this unit is receiving a secondary service.
This unit returns to the corresponding primary service
when the secondary service becomes timed out.
• You can change the information in the OSD and front
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
9
0
ENT.
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
3
2,4
1
Tune into the desired DAB service.
See page 59 for tuning instructions.
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
SP
A
L
R
PCM
Classic FM
60 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
2
Press MEMORY on the front panel (or DAB
MEMORY on the remote control).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
4
5
Press MEMORY on the front panel (or DAB
MEMORY on the remote control).
The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
RETURN
or
DAB MEMORY
Remote control
Front panel
Front panel
MEMORY
or
Repeat steps 1 through 4 to store other DAB
services.
Flashes
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
Note
Remote control
While you are browsing or changing the SET MENU parameters,
you cannot preset any DAB service.
3
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hon the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control) repeatedly until “EMPTY” appears
next to the preset service number in the front
panel display.
PRESET/CH
l
PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
ENTER
or
A/B/C/D/E
Front panel
Remote control
Flashes
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
DAB
SP
A
L
R
PCM
55 EMPTY
Preset service number
y
• “EMPTY” appears when no preset DAB service is
assigned to the corresponding service number.
• You can select the desired preset service number directly
by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
Note
Any stored DAB service data existing under a preset service
number is cleared when you store a new DAB service under
the same preset service number.
61 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Selecting preset DAB services
You can tune into any desired DAB service simply by
entering the corresponding preset service number under
which it was stored.
l
PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
or
A/B/C/D/E
Front panel
Remote control
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
PRESET
SP
A
L
R
PCM
56 Classic FM
2
Preset service number
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
Approximately after
3 seconds
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
9
0
ENT.
EFFECT
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
DAB
CD
PRESET/CH
VOLUME
dB
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
PRESET
SP
A
SRCH MODE
ENTER
L
R
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
PCM
Classic FM
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
2
y
• You can select the desired preset service number directly
by pressing the numeric buttons and ENTER on the
remote control. To enter numbers less than 10 (i.e. 1 to 9),
simply press 0 and then the number itself. For example, to
select the preset DAB service assigned to preset service
number 7, press 0 and then 7 in turn.
• “EMPTY” appears briefly when no preset DAB service is
assigned to the corresponding preset service number. The
DAB service currently being received is then displayed in
the front panel display.
1
2
Select “DAB” as the reception band and then
select “PRESET” as the DAB tuning method.
The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
See page 59 for the DAB tuning instructions.
PRESET
Lights up
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hon the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control) to browse through the preset DAB
services in the registry list.
Unassigned preset service numbers are skipped and
only assigned preset service numbers along with their
DAB service names appear in the front panel display
for approximately 3 seconds.
62 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
Service label
DAB service information
Use this feature to display various information about the
DAB service currently being received.
Displays the name of the current DAB service up to 16
characters.
DLS (Dynamic Label Segment)
Displays information about the current DAB service.
Examples are the title of the current song or program, the
name of the artist or speaker, and the name of the next
song or program. This data is continuously updated by the
DAB broadcaster, thus changing often with every new
song or program. Other data, such as news, weather, and
sports headlines, may be broadcast as well.
Press DISPLAY on the front panel (or on the
remote control) repeatedly while a DAB service is
currently being broadcast.
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
or
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Ensemble label
Front panel
Remote control
Displays the name of the current ensemble up to 16
characters.
Each time you press DISPLAY on the front panel (or on
the remote control), information displayed in the OSD and
front panel display changes in the following order.
Program type
Displays the genre (song or program type) of the current
DAB service up to 16 characters.
Information
Order
Example
type
Date and time
Displays the current date and time. This data is updated
with each passing minute.
1
Service label
Classic FM
Classic FM on
the
internet...
Dynamic Label
Segment
(DLS)
Audio mode and bit rate
Displays the audio mode and bit rate of the current DAB
service.
2
3
Digital1
Network
Channel label and frequency
Displays the channel label and frequency of the current
DAB service.
Ensemble label
4
5
Program type
Date and time
Classic Music
05JUL05 10:50
Signal quality
Displays the signal quality (from 0 (none) to 100 (best)) of
the current DAB service. A higher number means a better
reception level.
Audio mode
and bit rate
6
Stereo 160kbps
y
Channel label
and frequency
7
8
11D 222.06MHz
SignalQ.: 100
• When you turn on the video monitor connected to this unit, the
DAB information appears in the OSD as the following example.
Signal quality
DAB INFORMATION
To turn off the DAB information in the OSD, press and
hold DISPLAY on the front panel (or on the remote
control).
SERVICE:Classic FM
PROGRAM:Classic Music
DLS:(Classic FM on
DISPLAY MODE
ENSEMBL:Digital 1 Netwo
ꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Service
ꢀꢀꢀ ALPHANUMERIC
Notes
• The information order starts from the beginning again after the
signal quality information has been displayed in the front panel
display.
• If the DAB information contains a character that cannot be
recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with an
underscore “_”.
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. The dynamic label segment scrolls in a
continuous manner and the service label, ensemble label and
program type scroll at once.
• You can select the amount of time while the DAB information is
displayed in the OSD by using the “ON SCREEN” parameter in
63 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
Using DAB MENU
There are 5 operations in DAB MENU: “INIT SCAN”,
“TUNE AID”, “DRC MODE”, “PRUNE LIST”, and
“PRESET DEL”. Use the remote control to access and
adjust each operation in DAB MENU.
3
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU.
“INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
y
SRCH MODE
TV
This section explains how to access DAB MENU and perform
each operation using the front panel display. You can also
perform the DAB MENU operations using the OSD.
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
MD
SLEEP
CD
DVD
CD-R
A)INIT SCAN
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
5
6
7
8
TUNER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
1
y
9
0
ENT.
V-AUX
DVR
EFFECT
When you perform the DAB MENU operations using the
OSD, the following displays appear in the OSD.
PRESET/CH
AMP
SOURCE
TV
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
1
2
3,5
4
SRCH MODE
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
3 DAB MENU 1/2
ꢀꢀ.ꢀA)INIT SCAN
ꢀꢀꢀꢀB)TUNE AID
ꢀꢀꢀꢀC)DRC MODE
3 DAB MENU 2/2
ꢀꢀ.ꢀE)PRESET DEL
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
ꢀꢀꢀꢀD)PRUNE LIST
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
1
2
Set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press TUNER to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
4
Press u/ drepeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
AMP
SOURCE
TUNER
TV
For details about each operation, see pages 65 to 68.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Press BAND repeatedly to select “DAB” as
the reception band.
The DAB indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
TITLE
DAB
BAND
5
Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
Lights up
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
64 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
■ Initial scan A)INIT SCAN
Use this feature to locate all of the DAB ensembles and
services in your area. When “INIT SCAN” is selected, this
unit scans the entire range of Band III and L-Band (or the
limited range of Band III, if selected), and creates a
registry list of all the receivable DAB ensembles and
services.
3
Press ENTER to select the desired option.
“SCAN?[ENTER]” appears in the front panel
display.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
SCAN?[ENTER]
1
Press u/ drepeatedly to select “INIT SCAN”
in “DAB MENU”, and then press ENTER.
For details, see “Using DAB MENU” on page 64.
The current setting appears in the front panel display.
A/B/C/D/E
y
When you want to cancel the initial scan, press RETURN on
the remote control.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
4
Press ENTER again to start the selected
initial scan operation.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
SCAN:FULL
This unit starts scanning the selected band(s) for
DAB ensembles. While scanning is in progress,
“Scanning” appears in the front panel display. Once
scanning has been completed, “FINISH [###]”
appears in the front panel display for approximately 3
seconds (“###” indicates the number of receivable
DAB services), and then this unit returns to the DAB
tuning mode automatically.
2
Press j/ ito select the desired option.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Scanning 30%
SCAN:FULL
FINISH [015]
Example: if 15 DAB services were found
SCAN:UK BAND3
Choices: FULL, UK BAND3
• Select “FULL” to scan both Band III (174 – 240
MHz) and L-Band (1452 – 1490 GHz) for DAB
ensembles.
• Select “UK BAND3” to scan within the range of
Band III limited for United Kingdom (218 – 230
MHz) for DAB ensembles.
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
SP
A
L
R
PCM
Classic FM
65 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
■ Tuning aid B)TUNE AID
Note
Use this feature to display the strength of the current DAB
signals in the front panel display. You can use this feature
to adjust the positioning of the DAB antenna and this unit.
It is recommended that you perform this operation when
setting up this unit in order to maximize the DAB
reception capability.
If the initial scan operation was not successful, “Not
Available” appears in the front panel display. In such cases,
press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or u/ don the remote
control) to start “INIT SCAN” automatically.
y
• You can cancel the initial scan operation in the middle by
pressing RETURN on the remote control. When
“BREAK?[ENTER]” appears in the front panel display,
press ENTER on the remote control to return to “INIT
SCAN”.
1
Press u/ dto select “TUNE AID” in “DAB
MENU”, and then press ENTER.
For details, see “Using DAB MENU” on page 64.
The signal strength level of the selected DAB channel
appears in the front panel display.
• For further details about problems and their proper
remedies, see the “Tuner” section in
Display status: 0 (none) to 100 (best)
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
NET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
SP
A
L
R
PCM
5A LEVEL: 80
Selected DAB
channel label
Signal strength level
2
Press j/ ito switch between channel labels.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
5B LEVEL: 40
A/B/C/D/E
y
For a complete list of channel labels, see “DAB frequency
3
Press ENTER.
This unit returns to the “TUNE AID” menu.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
B)TUNE AID
A/B/C/D/E
66 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
■ DRC mode C)DRC MODE
Some DAB broadcasters transmit a wide dynamic range
enabling high quality sound, accompanied by DRC
(Dynamic Range Control) data. Use this feature to
compress the dynamic range of the DAB broadcast. This
is especially useful when you listen to a DAB service in a
noisy environment or at a low volume at night.
3
Press ENTER.
This unit returns to the “DRC MODE” menu.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
C)DRC MODE
A/B/C/D/E
1
Press u/ dto select “DRC MODE” in “DAB
MENU”, and then press ENTER.
For details, see “Using DAB MENU” on page 64.
The current setting appears in the front panel display.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DRC MODE:AUTO
2
Press j/ ito select the desired option.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
DRC MODE:AUTO
DRC MODE:OFF
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” to utilize DRC data (if
transmitted). The dynamic range of the DAB
signals is compressed, enhancing the audio quality
in a noisy environment or at a low volume at night.
• Select “OFF” not to utilize DRC data (if
transmitted). The dynamic range of the DAB
signals is played in full, enabling high quality
sound.
Note
If “DRC MODE: AUTO” is selected and the DAB broadcast
contains DRC data, the DRC indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
67 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
■ Prune list D)PRUNE LIST
Use this feature to delete a group of inactive DAB
ensembles and services from the DAB registry list.
■ Preset delete E)PRESET DEL
Use this feature to specify and delete unnecessary DAB
services from the DAB registry list.
1
Press u/ dto select “PRUNE LIST” in “DAB
MENU”, and then press ENTER.
For details, see “Using DAB MENU” on page 64.
“OK?[ENTER]” appears in the front panel display.
1
Press u/ dto select “PRESET DEL” in
“DAB MENU”, and then press ENTER.
For details, see “Using DAB MENU” on page 64.
“DELETE:--” appears in the front panel display.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DELETE:--
OK?[ENTER]
2
Press ENTER again to confirm your
selection.
2
Press j/ ito select the desired preset
service number.
Inactive DAB ensembles and services are deleted
from the DAB registry list. Once this operation has
been completed, “FINISH” appears in the front panel
display, and then this unit then returns to the “PRUNE
LIST” menu.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
DELETE:56
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
Note
ENTER
FINISH
Only the preset service number appears in the front panel
display.
A/B/C/D/E
3
Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
“OK?[ENTER]” appears in the front panel display.
PRESET/CH
D)PRUNE LIST
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
OK?[ENTER]
68 En
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
4
Press ENTER to delete the selected preset
DAB service from the DAB registry list.
Once this operation is has been completed, “DELETE
OK” appears in the front panel display, and then this
unit returns to the “PRESET DEL” menu.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
DELETE OK
E)PRESET DEL
y
To cancel the procedure, press RETURN.
69 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and
shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous
that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct
sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and
shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound
fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be
able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a
dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA
has done with the digital sound field processor.
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs
are applied.
■ Front panel operations
■ Remote control operations
AMP
AMP
SOURCE
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
Sound field program
selector buttons
NEXT
LEVEL
4
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
5
6
7
8
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
9
0
ENT.
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
PROGRAM selector
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press one of the sound field program
selector buttons on the remote control
repeatedly.
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
70 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field program descriptions
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE”
to “AUTO” (see page 35) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
Notes
• The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken
in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming
from the front, back, left and right.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.
■ For movie/video sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
y
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 70).
Remote
control
button
Sound field program
Features
Sources
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel
sources as they are.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
1
2
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates an enthusiastic atmosphere
where you can feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert.
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound environment of a
large concert hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of
watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or
sports programs.
ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
MULTI
2-CH
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces monaural video sources
(such as old movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth
using only the presence sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT
Mono Movie
3
CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to
video game sounds.
ENTERTAINMENT
Game
71 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Remote
control
button
Sound field program
Features
Sources
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound
field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions.
MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in
the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and
expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films
encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field
employing the most advanced techniques.
MOVIE THEATER
Sci-Fi
4
MULTI
2-CH
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the
newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of
the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are
restrained as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and
multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field.
MOVIE THEATER
General
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. STANDARD
SUR. ENHANCED
5
■ For music sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
y
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 70).
Remote
control
button
Sound field program
Features
Sources
2-CH
Plays back 2-channel sources.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
1
2
Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a
larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc.
STEREO
6ch Stereo
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert
hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound.
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom
Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated.
MUSIC
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music
environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A. The
listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall.
MUSIC
The Roxy Thtr
MULTI
2-CH
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a
lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and
energetic sound.
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
3
5
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. STANDARD
SUR. ENHANCED
72 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Changing sound field parameter
settings
2
Turn on the video monitor and then press
DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display is shown in the OSD.
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
Notes
• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to
initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a
Sound field program category
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the
sound field parameter name in the OSD.
• You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”
(see page 93). If you want to change the sound field parameter
values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
P02
.ꢀ
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
Cursor
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dBꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀP.INIT.DLY;;21ms
ꢀꢀP.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
ꢀꢀS.INIT.DLY;;25ms
ꢀꢀS.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
Sound field parameters Sound field parameter
values
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 74.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field
program parameter settings.
3
Press one of the sound field program
selector buttons repeatedly to select the
desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.
In this case, press u/ dto scroll through pages.
• If you press and hold j/ ito change the sound field parameter
value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the
front panel display.
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
3
AV
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
9
0
10
ENT.
MD
SLEEP
5
6
7
8
CD
CD-R
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
9
0
ENT.
DVD
TUNER
EFFECT
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
DVR
SRCH MODE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
1
ENTER
4
2
4
Press u/ dto select the desired sound field
parameter and then j/ ito change the
selected sound field parameter value.
• Press ito increase the value.
A/B/C/D/E
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
AUDIO
• Press jto decrease the value.
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP.
PRESET/CH
AMP
SOURCE
TV
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
73 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
y
To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 73 for details.
Sound field parameter
Features
DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on
the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level
relative to the level of the direct sound.
DSP LEVEL
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delays. Changes the apparent distance
from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The
larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set
to a large value.
INIT.DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INI.DLY
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
74 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field parameter
Features
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room sizes. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB ROOM SIZE
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Sound source
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Control range: 0 to 10
Source sound
Live
Dead
Time
Time
Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
75 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field parameter
Features
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
REV.TIME
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Reverberation
Source sound
Reverberation
Early reflections
60 dB
60 dB
60 dB
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
REV.DELAY
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
Reverberation
Time
REV.DELAY
REV.TIME
76 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field parameter
Features
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
REV.LEVEL
Control range: 0 to 100%
Source sound
REV. LEVEL
Time
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
2ch Stereo
DIRECT
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
• The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the
subwoofer in the following cases:
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 83).
6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the
volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode.
6ch Stereo
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
Control range: 0 to 100%
77 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field parameter
Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround
speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
PANORAMA
Choices: OFF, ON
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards
the front or towards the rear.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
DIMENSION
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output
completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value
moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
CENTER WIDTH
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the
center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
DTS Neo:6 Music
C.IMAGE
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
y
The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR.
STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to
78 En
SET MENU
SET MENU
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
Parameter
Features
Page
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
crossover frequency.
82
A)SPEAKER SET
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
84
85
85
85
86
86
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
C)SP DISTANCE
D)CENTER GEQ
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
Parameter
Features
Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
Page
87
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
B)INPUT MODE
88
Changes the name of the input source.
88
C)INPUT RENAME
D)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
89
79 En
SET MENU
DAB menu 3 DAB MENU
Parameter
A)INIT SCAN
B)TUNE AID
Features
Page
89
Locates all of the DAB ensembles and services in your area.
Displays the strength of the current DAB signals.
89
Compresses the dynamic range of the DAB broadcast.
89
C)DRC MODE
Deletes a group of inactive DAB ensembles and services from the DAB registry list.
Specifies and deletes unnecessary DAB services from the DAB registry list.
89
D)PRUNE LIST
E)PRESET DEL
89
Network and USB menu 4 NET/USB MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters.
Parameter
Features
Page
Configures the network settings automatically or manually.
A)NETWORK
Adjusts the playback style.
B)PLAY STYLE
C)INFORMATION
Displays the network system information.
Option menu 5 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
Parameter
Features
Page
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. Sets the OSD display time as
well as the front panel display scrolling mode.
A)DISPLAY SET
92
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
93
93
93
B)MEMORY GUARD
C)PARAM. INI
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
D)MULTI ZONE SET
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
80 En
SET MENU
Using SET MENU
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
2
3
Press u/ dto select “MANUAL SETUP”.
PRESET/CH
ꢀꢀSET MENU
ꢀꢀ;BASICꢀSETUP
.ꢀ;MANUALꢀSETUP
.ꢀ;SIGNAL INFO
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
MD
SLEEP
ENTER
CD
CD-R
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
A/B/C/D/E
5
6
7
8
ꢀꢀ[ ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
DVD
TUNER
USB
DOCK
V-AUX
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
9
0
ENT.
DVR
NET
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
AMP
SOURCE
TV
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
1
1,7
2-6
SRCH MODE
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
ON SCREEN
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
PRESET/CH
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
• If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons
during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU”
operation is canceled.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each
parameter setting.
• Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level.
;MANUAL SETUP1/2
.ꢀ1ꢀSOUNDꢀMENU
ꢀꢀ2ꢀINPUTꢀMENU
ꢀꢀ3ꢀDAB MENU
ꢀꢀ4ꢀNET/USB MENU
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
;MANUAL SETUP2/2
.ꢀ5ꢀOPTIONꢀMENU
Note
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU to enter “SET
MENU”.
4
Press u/ drepeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired menu.
The following displays are examples where “SOUND
MENU” is selected.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
SRCH MODE
TV
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ꢀꢀSET MENU
.ꢀ;BASICꢀSETUP
ꢀ;MANUALꢀSETUP
.ꢀ;SIGNAL INFO
1 SOUND MENU 1/2
ꢀꢀ.ꢀA)SPEAKERꢀSET
ꢀꢀꢀꢀB)SPEAKERꢀLEVEL
ꢀꢀꢀꢀC)SPꢀDISTANCE
ꢀꢀꢀꢀD)CENTER GEQ
1 SOUND MENU 2/2
ꢀꢀ.ꢀE)LFE LEVEL
ꢀꢀꢀꢀF)DYNAMIC RANGE
ꢀꢀꢀꢀG)AUDIO SET
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀ[ ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
81 En
SET MENU
1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors.
5
Press u/ drepeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
The following display is an example where
“SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
1 SOUND MENU 1/2
ꢀꢀ.ꢀA)SPEAKERꢀSET
ꢀꢀꢀꢀB)SPEAKERꢀLEVEL
ꢀꢀꢀꢀC)SPꢀDISTANCE
ꢀꢀꢀꢀD)CENTER GEQ
1 SOUND MENU 2/2
ꢀꢀ.ꢀE)LFE LEVEL
ꢀꢀꢀꢀF)DYNAMIC RANGE
ꢀꢀꢀꢀG)AUDIO SET
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ENTER
ENTER
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ-__________+
ꢀꢀ.ꢀꢀꢀFL;;;;;;;;;;
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFR;;;;;;;;;;
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ C;;;;;;;;;;
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
6
Press u/ dto select the desired parameter
and then j/ ito change the parameter
settings.
FRONT SP
• Press ito increase the value.
• Press jto decrease the value.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ꢀꢀ ꢀꢀ SMALLꢀ>LARGE
•
•
Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front
speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left
and right channels are directed to the speakers selected
in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 83).
Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front
speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. All the front left and right channel signals
are directed to the front left and right speakers.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
7
Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
Note
If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 83), the LFE
signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency
signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency
signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all
directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
82 En
SET MENU
Center speaker CENTER SP
Surround back speakers SUR. B SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
SUR. B SP
CENTER SP
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ NONEꢀ>SML ꢀLRG
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀNONEꢀ>SMLꢀꢀLRG
•
•
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a
surround back speaker. The surround back channel
signals are directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround
back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround back channel are directed to the speakers
selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back
speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals
effectively. All the surround back channel signals are
directed to the surround back speaker.
•
•
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the
front left and right speakers.
Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center
speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/
BASS OUT”.
Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker
that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All
the center channel signals are directed to the center
speaker.
•
•
Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
SUR. L/R SP
LFE/BASS OUT
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀNONEꢀ>SMLꢀꢀLRG
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀSWFRꢀFRNT>BOTH
•
•
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 44) and “SUR. B SP” is automatically
set to “NONE”.
Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left
and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround left and right channels are directed to the
speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left
and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
•
•
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a
subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a
subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels, and the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right
speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see
page 82).
Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.
The low-frequency signals of any source are output
from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”
(or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-
frequency signals of the front left and right channels
are directed to the front left and right speakers and the
subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see
page 82).
•
•
83 En
SET MENU
Crossover CROSSOVER
■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 82).
Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB
Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 82 and 83). All frequencies
below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer
or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 82 and 83).
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ-__________+
ꢀꢀ.ꢀꢀꢀFL;;;;;;;;;;
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFR;;;;;;;;;;
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ C;;;;;;;;;;
CROSSOVER
ꢀꢀꢀꢀFREQ;;;80Hz
•
•
Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left
speaker.
Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right
speaker.
Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker.
Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left
speaker.
Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right
speaker.
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
•
•
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
02ASUBWOOFER PHASE
•
•
•
Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back
speaker.
Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ>NORMALꢀꢀREVERSE
•
•
Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
Note
“C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if
“CENTER SP” (see page 83), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 83),
“SUR. B SP” (see page 83) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 83)
are set to “NONE” respectively.
84 En
SET MENU
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You
can make adjustments while listening to the currently
selected source component or a test tone.
Control range: –6 to +6 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
C)SP DISTANCE
D)CENTER GEQ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀ100Hz ;;;;;;
ꢀꢀ300Hz ;;;;;;
ꢀꢀꢀ1kHz ;;;;;;
ꢀꢀꢀ3kHz ;;;;;;
ꢀꢀ10kHz ;;;;;;
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Adjust
ꢀꢀ. UNIT;;;;;;meters
ꢀꢀꢀꢀFRONTꢀL;;;;3.00m
ꢀꢀꢀꢀFRONTꢀR;;;;3.00m
ꢀꢀꢀꢀCENTER;;;;;3.00m
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Adjust
.ꢀTESTꢀꢀ>OFFꢀꢀON
-______+
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Test tone TEST
Choices: OFF, ON
•
Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
•
Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
•
Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
selected source component.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
•
Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center
speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround
back speaker.
Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
y
Press u/ dto select a frequency band and j/ ito adjust the
selected frequency band.
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
E)LFE LEVEL
.ꢀSPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
ꢀꢀHEADPHONE;;;;0dB
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Adjust
Note
Speaker SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
“CENTER”, “SUR.L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR.B” and “SWFR” cannot
be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 83), “SUR. L/R SP” (see
page 83), “SUR. B SP” (see page 83) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see
page 83) are set to “NONE” respectively.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Note
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 83),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
jack.
85 En
SET MENU
■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
G)AUDIO SET
ꢀꢀ.ꢀMUTING TYPE;FULL
ꢀꢀꢀꢀAUDIO DELAY;;0ms
ꢀꢀꢀꢀTONE BYPASS;AUTO
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
.ꢀSP:ꢀMINꢀSTD>MAX
ꢀꢀHP:ꢀMINꢀSTD>MAX
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
ꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
Muting type MUTING TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 34).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
Speaker SP
Adjusts the speaker compression.
•
Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Headphone HP
Adjusts the headphone compression.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
•
•
Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
Audio delay AUDIO DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
•
•
Control step: 1 ms
Tone bypass TONE BYPASS
Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses
tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are
Choices: AUTO, OFF
•
•
Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.
Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry.
86 En
SET MENU
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4
OPTICAL IN (2)
2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the
input mode or rename the input source.
OPTICAL IN (3)
OPTICAL IN (4)
Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ2ꢀINPUTꢀMENU
ꢀꢀ.ꢀA)I/OꢀASSIGNMENT
(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
ꢀꢀꢀꢀB)INPUTꢀMODE
ꢀꢀꢀꢀC)INPUTꢀRENAME
ꢀꢀꢀꢀD)VOLUME TRIM
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
(4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
ꢀꢀꢀꢀOPTICALꢀIN
ꢀꢀ.ꢀ(2);;;;;MD/CD-R
■ Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
(MD/CD-Rꢀ)
(3);;;;; DVD
ꢀꢀꢀ(ꢀꢀDVD ꢀꢀ)
(4);;;;;DTV/CBL
ꢀꢀꢀ(DTV/CBL )
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 COAXIAL IN (5)
Choices: (5) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
ꢀꢀꢀꢀCOAXIALꢀIN
ꢀꢀ.ꢀ(5);;;;; DVD
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C
CMPNT-V INPUT [A]
(
DVD
)
CMPNT-V INPUT [B]
CMPNT-V INPUT [C]
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
Notes
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀCMPNT-VꢀINPUT
ꢀꢀ.ꢀ[A];;;;;ꢀꢀDVD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ(ꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀ)
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[B];;;;;DTV/CBL
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ(DTV/CBLꢀ)
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[C];;;;; DVR
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ( DVR ꢀ)
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1)
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
ꢀꢀꢀꢀOPTICALꢀOUT
ꢀꢀ.ꢀ(1);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R )
87 En
SET MENU
■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE
Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE”
setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”,
or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on
this unit.
2
3
Press j/ ion the remote control to place the
“_” (underscore) under the space or the
character you want to edit.
PRESET/CH
Choices: AUTO, LAST
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
ꢀꢀꢀꢀB)INPUTꢀMODE
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ>AUTOꢀꢀLAST
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Return
Press u/ dto select the character you want
to use and then press j/ ito move to the
next space.
•
•
Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to
setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit
automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall
the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”)
used for that source whenever you turn on this unit.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Notes
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press dto change the character in the following order, or
press uto go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,
*, +, –, etc.)
■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀC)INPUTꢀRENAME
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀDVDꢀ->ꢀꢀ DVD
4
5
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Position
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Chara.
Press ENTER on the remote control to exit
from “INPUT RENAME”.
PRESET/CH
1
Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the input source
you want to change the name of.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
MD
SLEEP
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
DVD
TUNER
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
DVR
88 En
SET MENU
■ Volume trim D)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DOCK, DVR, PC/MCX, USB, NET
RADIO, MULTI CH IN
3 DAB MENU
Use this menu to adjust the DAB tuning parameters as
well as the DAB ensemble/service registry list. For details,
3 DAB MENU 1/2
ꢀꢀ.ꢀA)INIT SCAN
ꢀꢀꢀꢀB)TUNE AID
ꢀꢀꢀꢀC)DRC MODE
3 DAB MENU 2/2
ꢀꢀ.ꢀE)PRESET DEL
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
ꢀꢀꢀꢀD)PRUNE LIST
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
ꢀꢀꢀꢀD)VOLUME TRIM
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ DVD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀDVDꢀ->ꢀꢀ 0.0dB
■ Initial scan A)INIT SCAN
See page 65 for details.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Adjust
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[RETURN]:Exit
■ Tuning aid B)TUNE AID
See page 66 for details.
■ DRC mode C)DRC MODE
See page 67 for details.
■ Prune list D)PRUNE LIST
See page 68 for details.
■ Preset delete E)PRESET DEL
See page 68 for details.
89 En
SET MENU
Primary DNS server DNS (P)
4 NET/USB MENU
Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system
parameters.
Secondary DNS server DNS (S)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary
and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
Note
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in
“DNS (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of
them in “DNS (P)” and another in “DNS (S)”.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
4ꢀNET/USBꢀMENU
ꢀꢀ.ꢀA)NETWORK
B)PLAY STYLE
C)INFORMATION
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
1
Press u/ don the remote control repeatedly
and then press ENTER to select and enter
the desired network parameter.
■ Network settings A)NETWORK
Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP
address, etc.) or to change them manually.
Note
When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust
any other network settings. To specify the other parameters,
you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀA)NETWORK
.ꢀ DHCP
ON
IP
192.168.000.002
2
To specify the parameter, press
to change the number and press
the digit to change.
u
/
d
repeatedly
to select
SUBNET 255.255.255.000
GATEWAY 192.168.000.001
DNS (P) 192.168.000.001
DNS (S) 000.000.000.000
SET
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
j
/
i
>CANCEL
3
4
Press ENTER to confirm the parameter.
Note
network parameter.
The above display is an example.
DHCP DHCP
When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters
for “IP”, “SUBNET”, “GATEWAY”, “DNS (P)” and
“DNS (S)” obtained from a DHCP enabled router are
displayed. If DHCP server function is not available, set
this parameter to “OFF” to configure the network
parameters manually.
5
Select “SET” and then press ENTER to finish
configuration.
Note
In case you have changed your network configuration, you may
need to reconfigure the network settings again.
Choices: ON, OFF
y
IP address IP
You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory
settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see
Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to
this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for
other devices in the target network.
Subnet mask SUBNET
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value
assigned to this unit.
y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as
“255.255.255.0”.
Default gateway GATEWAY
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default
gateway.
90 En
SET MENU
■ Playback styles B)PLAY STYLE
■ Network information C)INFORMATION
Use this feature to display the network system
information.
Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to
your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order
or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀC)INFORMATION
ꢀꢀꢀꢀB)PLAY STYLE
ꢀꢀ.ꢀREPEAT;;;;;;;OFF
SHUFFLE;;;;;;OFF
ꢀꢀ ꢀMAC ADDRESS
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
STATUS
10BASE-T
FULL-DUPLEX
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Return
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
Note
Repeat REPEAT
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL
The above display is an example.
MAC (Media Access Control) address
MAC ADDRESS
•
•
•
Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one song.
Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
This information displays the MAC address that is
assigned to this unit.
Status STATUS
This information displays the current link status of the
network.
Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
FULL-DUPLEX, HALF-DUPLEX,
NO LINK
Notes
• When “REPEAT” is set to a setting other than “OFF”, the
highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner of the
playback status screen while one song or a sequence of songs
are being repeated.
• If “REPEAT” is set to “SINGLE”, the setting will be reset to
“OFF” when both the main zone and Zone 2 are turned off.
Note
“NO LINK” appears when network connection is not made.
Shuffle SHUFFLE
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Choices: OFF, ON
•
•
Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
Select “ON” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Note
When “SHUFFLE” is set to “ON”, the highlighted letter “S”
appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while
songs or albums are being shuffled.
91 En
SET MENU
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
5 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
•
•
Press jto raise the position of the OSD.
Press ito lower the position of the OSD.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ5ꢀOPTIONꢀMENU
ꢀꢀ.ꢀA)DISPLAYꢀSET
B)MEMORYꢀGUARD
Gray back GRAY BACK
C)PARAM.ꢀINI
D)MULTI ZONEꢀSET
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Enter
Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD
when there is no video signal being input.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
•
Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the
OSD when there is no video signal being input.
Select “OFF” not to display any background in the
OSD.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
•
ꢀꢀꢀꢀA)DISPLAYꢀSET
ꢀꢀ.ꢀDIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
ꢀꢀꢀꢀVIDEOꢀCONV.;;;ON
ꢀꢀꢀꢀOSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
GRAYꢀBACK;;;AUTO
ꢀꢀꢀꢀA)DISPLAYꢀSET
ꢀꢀ.ꢀON SCREEN;;;;10s
ꢀꢀꢀꢀFL SCROLL;;;CONT
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
Notes
• Depending on the video signals being input or the system
setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be
displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to
“OFF”.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
• Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not
be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the
picture.
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
On-screen display time ON SCREEN
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
DAB information, iPod menu or NET/USB menu in the
OSD after you perform a certain operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Control step: 1
•
•
Press jto make the front panel display dimmer.
Press ito make the front panel display brighter.
•
•
•
Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an
operation.
Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
•
Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals
interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video
signals to component video signals.
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Use this feature to set whether to display the information
(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once
when “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the input
source.
•
Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.
Notes
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.
Choices: CONT, ONCE
•
•
Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
92 En
SET MENU
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET
Use this feature to specify the location of speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀD)MULTI ZONEꢀSET
ꢀꢀ.ꢀSPꢀB;;;;;;;FRONT
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀB)MEMORYꢀGUARD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ>OFFꢀꢀꢀON
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Return
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[<]/[>]:Select
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Return
Speaker B setting SP B
•
•
Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”
feature.
Select “ON” to protect:
– DSP program parameters
– all “SET MENU” items
– all speaker levels
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
•
Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main zone.
•
Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at
the SPEAKERS B terminals only.
Note
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.
■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
factory settings.
Press the corresponding sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control to select the sound field
program that you want to initialize.
Notes
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B
terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”.
• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”,
this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field
program names that have been changed from their initial
factory settings.
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD
ꢀꢀꢀꢀC)PARAM.ꢀINI
STEREO
*MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
*STANDARD
Press DSP key
Notes
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 93).
93 En
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED SETUP
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Notes
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see
• Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
3
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the parameter you want to
adjust.
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
MAN'L/AUTO FM
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
See page 95 for a complete list of available
parameters.
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
PROGRAM
1-2,5
2,4 3
1
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
Currently selected
parameter
Currently selected
parameter setting
MASTER
SP IMP.-8 MIN
ON
OFF
4
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to change the selected
parameter setting.
2
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel, and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
While holding
down
MASTER
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
5
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
ON
OFF
MASTER
ON
OFF
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
94 En
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN
■ Network reset N-RESET
Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit
(see page 90) to the initial factory settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
•
•
Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.
•
Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of
Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
this unit.
•
Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this
unit.
SP IMP.
Speaker
Impedance level
Notes
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ωor
higher.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
• When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB
registered client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000
is cleared (see page 108).
Front
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 Ωor
8ΩMIN
*
higher.
■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
Center
Surround
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ωor
higher.
Choices: ID1, ID2
•
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “00001”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “00002”.
Surround back
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ωor
higher.
Note
Front
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ωor
higher.
6ΩMIN
■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition (see page 99).
Choices: ID1, ID2
Center
Surround
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ωor
higher.
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “81916”.
Surround back
•
Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “81917”.
■ Factory presets PRESET
Note
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 111).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library
•
Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
•
Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
Notes
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
95 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
■ Controlling this unit
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this
unit.
■ Controlling a TV
Set the component selector switch to TV to control your
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate
remote control code for DTV/CBL or
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
When you set the remote control codes for both
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
AV
DTV/CBL and
DTV/CBL.
, priority is given to the one set for
MD
SLEEP
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
DVD
TUNER
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
DVR
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
*1
AMP
SOURCE
TV
AV
MD
SLEEP
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
MUTE
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
DVD
TUNER
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
*1
DVR
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
MUTE
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
9
0
ENT.
EFFECT
*2
PRESET/CH
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
SRCH MODE
ENTER
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
A/B/C/D/E
5
6
7
8
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
ON SCREEN
9
0
ENT.
AUDIO
EFFECT
*2
PRESET/CH
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
USB
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/TEXT
MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
SRCH MODE
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
AUDIO
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
USB
FREQ/TEXT
MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
Notes
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
component selector switch position.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component
selector switch is set to AMP.
Notes
*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
component selector switch position.
Remote control
Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER
Turns on or off the power.
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV VOL +/–
TV CH +/–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
Changes the channel number.
Mutes the audio output.
Changes the input source.
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the component
selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/
96 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Controlling other components
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons,
or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. You
must set the appropriate remote control code for each
function of each control button used to control other
components assigned to each input selector button,
and the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. Be advised
that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected
component.
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
1
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
AV
5
6
7
8
2
MD
SLEEP
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
10
STRAIGHT
CD
CD-R
9
0
ENT.
7
8
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
DVD
TUNER
USB
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SET MENU
MENU
DOCK
V-AUX
3
4
SRCH MODE
DVR
NET
ENTER
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A/B/C/D/E
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
REC
DISPLAY
9
5
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
MUTE
ON SCREEN
AUDIO
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
USB
6
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
FREQ/TEXT
MODE PTY SEEK START
EON
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
PC/MCX-2000/
Internet radio/
USB
DVD player/
recorder
Digital TV/
Cable TV
MD/CD
recorder
iPod®
Remote control
VCR
LD/CD player
Tuner
Power *1
Power *1
Power *2
Power *1
Power *1
1
AV POWER
1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Preset stations
(1-8)
2
Title
Band
Bookmark *5
Up
3
4
TITLE
Preset up
(1-8)
PRESET/CH
u
Up
VCR channel up Up
VCR channel
Up
PRESET/CH
d
Preset down
(1-8)
Down
Down
Down
Down
down
Preset down
(A-E)
A/B/C/D/E j Left
Left
Previous menu Previous menu
Preset up
(A-E)
Subsequent
menu
Subsequent
menu
A/B/C/D/E i Right
Right
Subsequent
menu
Subsequent
menu
ENTER
Enter
Enter
Return
Return
5
6
RETURN
REC
Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
*3
Disc skip
Rec *3
Play
Rec *2*3
Play *2
(CD player)
Rec *3
Play
Select PC/MCX
Play
p
Play
Play
Play
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *4
Select
NET RADIO
w
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward *2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward *4
f
Select USB
Sound
(LD player)
AUDIO
e
Audio
Pause
Audio
Pause
Audio *2
Pause *2
Pause
Pause
Pause
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward *2
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward *6
b
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward *2
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward *6
a
s
Stop
Stop
Stop *2
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Chapter/Time
(LD player)
Index
7
ENT.
Title/Index
Enter
Enter
Index
(CD player)
Menu
Menu
Previous menu Previous menu
Display Display
8
9
MENU
Display
Display
Display
Display
Display
DISPLAY
Notes
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2 These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 98).
*3 When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction.
*4 Press and hold to search backward or forward.
*5 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks (see page 109).
*6 These buttons are not operational when the Internet radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB.
97 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Setting the remote control code
1
Press one of the input selector buttons,
or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R
to select the component you want to set up.
You can control your TV and other components by setting
the appropriate remote control code for each input source.
For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer
to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of
this manual.
MD
SLEEP
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
DVD
TUNER
USB
The following table shows the default component in the
“Library (component category)” column and the remote
control code for each input source.
DOCK
V-AUX
DVR
NET
Remote Control Code Default Settings
2
3
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
Library
(component
category)
Input
source
Default
code
Manufacturer
CD
MD/CD-R
DVD
CD
MD
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
61907
70888
40539
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
DVD
DTV/
CBL
–
–
–
Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter
the five-digit remote control code for the
component to be used.
TUNER
TUNER
YAMAHA
81916
OTHERAUDIO
ACCESSORIES
(iPod)
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the remote control code for the
selected component is set.
V-AUX/
DOCK
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
81981
51544
81982
DVR
DVR
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
(NET/USB)
NET/
USB
TRANSMIT
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
5
6
7
8
Flashes
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
–
–
–
9
0
10
ENT.
EFFECT
Blank
button
TAPE
YAMAHA
70524
y
To clear the remote control code previously set for the selected
component, enter the code number “9980”.
Note
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes.
Notes
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the
setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup
procedure.
y
The blank button is the one on the right of MD/CD-R.
98 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library
Setting library codes
codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
TUNER ID library code for the component you want to
use.
You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or
amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote
control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to
select and operate the desired component with the
supplied remote control.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
■ Setting remote control AMP ID library
codes
TUNER
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP ID library code for the component you want to use.
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
1
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
CODE SET
Flashes
Flashes
3
Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “81916” or “81917”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is
changed.
2
Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “00001” or “00002”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is
changed.
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ENT.
Flashes
9
0
10
ENT.
Flashes
EFFECT
EFFECT
TUNER ID
librarycode
*1
Remote
control
TUNER ID *2
AMP ID
librarycode
*1
Remote
control AMP
ID *2
Function
Function
To operate this unit using
81916
To operate this unit using
ID1
00001
ID1
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
(initial setting)
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
(initial setting)
81917
ID2
00002
ID2
*1 The remote control setting
*1 The remote control setting
*2 The setting of this unit (see page 95)
*2 The setting of this unit (see page 95)
Notes
Notes
• You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER
ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 95).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID
of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 95).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
99 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Resetting all remote control codes
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory
settings.
1
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
2
Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “9981”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and all the remote control codes
previously set are cleared and reset to the initial
factory settings.
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
TRANSMIT
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ENT.
Flashes
EFFECT
y
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step
2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the
clearing procedure.
100 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce
separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone
using the supplied remote control.
Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be
connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connecting Zone 2
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
•
•
An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the
infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.
An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
•
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need
to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown below.
REMOTE IN
REMOTE IN
REMOTE IN
REMOTE IN
REMOTE OUT
REMOTE OUT
REMOTE OUT
REMOTE OUT
Infrared signal
receiver
YAMAHA
component
YAMAHA
component
This unit
■ Multi-zone configuration and Zone 2 connections
Main zone
Second zone
ZONE 2 OUTPUT
SP OUT
Amplifier
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO IN
Remote control
VIDEO IN
DVD player
This unit
MAIN ZONE
ZONE 2
Infrared signal receiver
Infrared signal emitter
REMOTE OUT
REMOTE IN
Notes
• When you do not use the main zone, press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to turn off the main zone.
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
101 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
Controlling Zone 2
You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control
buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are listed as follows:
2
3
Press ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.
The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
ZONE
CONTROL
•
•
Selecting the input source of Zone 2
ZONE2
Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source of Zone 2 (see page 46)
Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source
Flashes
•
Rotate the INPUT selector to select the
desired input source while the ZONE2
indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
y
The volume level and tonal quality of Zone 2 cannot be adjusted.
Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in Zone 2.
INPUT
Notes
• You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is
flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode
is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal
operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection
procedure.
• The Zone 2 control function is operational only when MASTER
ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON
position.
4
Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the
standby mode.
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel
1
Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2.
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
y
ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when MASTER
ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON
position.
102 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
■ Setting the remote control to the Zone 2
1
Press and hold POWER or STANDBY and
mode
then press
to set the remote control to
Note
the Zone 2 mode.
• Press POWER when the main zone is turned on.
• Press STANDBY when the main zone is turned off.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
lights up while the remote control is set to the Zone 2
mode.
The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control
the main zone. To control Zone 2 with the remote control, you
must first set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode.
1
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
POWER
While holding
down
TRANSMIT
or
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
STANDBY
Lights up
Flashes
Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “9992”.
2
3
Press POWER to turn on Zone 2.
POWER
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.
TRANSMIT
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
Press one of the input selector buttons to
select the desired input source of Zone 2.
9
0
10
ENT.
Flashes
EFFECT
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote
MD
SLEEP
control
CD
CD-R
CBL
DTV
MULTI CH IN
DVD
TUNER
Notes
DOCK
V-AUX
USB
NET
• The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control
the main zone, and the TRANSMIT indicator on the remote
control is turned off when the remote control is set to the main
mode.
DVR
y
To mute the audio output of Zone 2, press MUTE on the
remote control. Press MUTE again to resume the audio
output of Zone 2.
• When the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode, POWER,
STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons are set to
control Zone 2. However, the rest of the remote control buttons
remain in the main mode.
MUTE
• The remote control automatically exits from the Zone 2 mode in
the following cases:
– when you do not make any operations within 10 seconds after
the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode.
– when you press a remote control button other than POWER,
STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons.
4
Press STANDBY to set Zone 2 to the standby
mode.
STANDBY
103 En
USING IPOD®
®
USING iPod
Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 21), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 37).
Notes
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
Controlling iPod
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD
the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done
of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in
with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)
the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL”
or without it (simple remote mode).
parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 92). You can
also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD.
Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to
suit your personal preferences.
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the OSD of this unit.
Notes
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
iPod.
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are
replaced with underscores “_”.
• The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the
OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the
“Setup” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your
iPod to select the desired photos or video clips.
104 En
USING iPod®
Shuffle Shuffle
1
2
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display appears in the OSD.
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
•
•
Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a
random order.
iPod
Top
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
DISPLAY
•
Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a
random order.
ON SCREEN
Composers
Setup
Note
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, the
highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs
or albums are being shuffled.
Press u/ d / j/ ion the remote control to
navigate the iPod menu and then press
ENTER to begin playback of the selected
song.
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Choices: Off, One, All
•
•
•
Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Note
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, the
highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one
song or a sequence of songs are being repeated.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Setup > Shuffle, Repeat
105 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA
files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the
Internet radio.
Notes
• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical
reference books, if needed.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “Network and USB” section in
Navigating the network and USB menus
The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.
Selects a song by playlist stored on the server. Refer to the documents of
the server for details about the playlist file format, the process of creating
the playlist file, etc.
NET/USB
PC/MusicCAST
(MCX-2000)
Server*
Playlists
Artists
Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the
artist (MCX-2000 only).
Selects a song by album.
Selects a song directly.
Albums
Songs
Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the
genre (MCX-2000 only).
Genres
Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.
Recall Play
Selects an Internet radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 109).
Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by location.
Internet Radio
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by genre.
Selects an Internet radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.
New Stations
Selects an Internet radio station from the list of popular stations.
Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.
Selects a file by navigating directories.
Help
USB
Files/Directories
Note
*
Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
106 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate
details about each sub input source.
2
Press MENU on the remote control to display
the top NET/USB menu.
The following display appears in the OSD.
If any other display appears in the OSD, press MENU
on the remote control repeatedly until the top
NET/USB menu appears.
Note
“Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for
communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
NET/USB
Top
1
Set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the
remote control to select “NET/USB” as the
input source.
The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator
lights up in the front panel display, and the contents
previously played for the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB is automatically played.
PC/MusicCAST
Internet Radio
USB
>
>
>
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
1/3
3
4
Press u/ dto select the desired sub input
source and then press ior ENTER.
AMP
y
USB
You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing
SOURCE
NET
TV
Press u/ d / j/ ion the remote control to
select the desired song or Internet radio
station.
Lights up
• Press u/ dto select the desired menu.
• Press ito enter the selected menu.
• Press jto return to the previous menu level.
pNET
USB
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
L
R
PC/MCX
y
• “i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that
there is a submenu available in the next menu level.
• You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected
menu or to return to the previous menu level.
5
Press ENTER to play the selected song or to
listen to the selected station.
107 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
■ Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0
on your PC
With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the
audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents
of Windows Media Connect 2.0.
Using a PC server or YAMAHA
MCX-2000
Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or
YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that
enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive
MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a
personal network.
1
Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media
Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website.
1
Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA
MCX-2000.
2
Turn on your PC and then share a folder on
the PC.
• This procedure is needed only the first time.
The Shared folder is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
Notes
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus
software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this
unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software
appropriately.
• If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the
PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect
the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead
of the domain.
2
3
Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.
The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server
list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
Select a desired server or MusicCAST to
begin playback.
Notes
• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1
MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same
subnet as this unit.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be
playable or may be noisy when played.
• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not
been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files
immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting
of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the OSD.
• You can use b/ ato skip backward/forward and h/ s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL
SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 92).
108 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
■ Registering this unit on the YAMAHA
MCX-2000
You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000
so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA
MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual
supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000.
Using the Internet radio
Use this feature to listen to Internet radio stations. This
unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service
particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000
radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite
stations with bookmarks.
1
2
Turn off this unit.
Notes
Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto
Config” mode.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet radio stations may not be played even if they are
selected in the NET RADIO menu.
• To listen to the Internet radio, connect this unit to your network
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will
not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,
etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.
3
Turn on this unit.
• MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MCX.
• The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of
your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CL-
XXXXX), and this completes the automatic
configuration procedure.
y
• You can use h/ sto start/stop playback independently from
the menu in the OSD.
Notes
• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet radio service, and there are a
number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The
Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops
playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access
of this unit to Internet radio stations. In such cases, configure
the security settings appropriately.
• The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5
digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC
• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual
Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in
• The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other
than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client
title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will
stop the playback on this unit.
■ Storing your favorite Internet radio
stations with bookmarks
Use this feature to select your favorite Internet radio
stations quickly.
Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while
the selected Internet radio station service is
being broadcast.
The stored Internet radio station is added to the
y
To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the
first level of the “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE
on the remote control.
109 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
Using a USB memory device or a
USB portable audio player
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3
and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or
USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on
the front panel of this unit.
Notes
• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT
16 or FAT 32.
• Only the first partition is displayed in the OSD. You cannot
select files in other partitions.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per
directory are recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the
requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may
be noisy when played.
• When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable
audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the OSD.
• You can use b/ ato skip backward/forward and h/ s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL
SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 92).
110 En
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
Notes
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup
menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it
outward to the OFF position.
3
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “PRESET”.
VOLUME
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
MASTER
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
NEXT
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
TONE CONTROL
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
USB
VIDEO
L
R
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
1-2,5
2,4 3
1
2
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
PRESET-CANCEL
4
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “RESET”.
MASTER
STRAIGHT
ON
OFF
EFFECT
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
PRESET-RESET
While holding
down
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MASTER
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
ON
OFF
5
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to
confirm your selection and turn off this unit.
MASTER
ON
OFF
111 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
“INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or
“ANALOG”.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”.
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH
INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control).
Speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A or
B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote
control.
The volume is turned down.
The sound is muted.
Turn up the volume.
—
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”
while playing a source encoded in DTS.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
—
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
No picture
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
112 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
—
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
The sleep timer has turned off this unit.
The sound is muted.
Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output.
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER
LEVEL”.
Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for Try another sound field program.
“6ch Stereo”) has been selected.
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
“NONE”.
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speaker.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or
“NONE” and “SUR. B SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
“LRG”.
“SUR. B SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-
channel source is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
The source does not contain low-
frequency signals.
113 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
display does not light
up.)
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
INPUT jacks.
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
IN jacks.
The sound field
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
—
parameters and some is set to “ON”.
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
—
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
This unit is too close to the digital or high- Move this unit further away from such equipment.
frequency equipment.
frequency equipment.
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
114 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
—
There is distortion,
and clear reception
cannot be obtained
even with a good FM
antenna.
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
FM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
—
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
—
AM
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
Cannot tune into any
DAB services.
The initial scan operations were not
performed, or the DAB registry list
needs to be updated.
Perform the initial scan operations.
There is no DAB coverage in your
area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDAB online
at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.
—
The DAB signals are too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
—
The initial scan
operations are not
successful and “Not
Available” appears in
the front panel
The DAB antenna may not be
connected.
Make sure the DAB antenna is firmly
connected.
The DAB signals are too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
—
—
There is no DAB coverage in your
area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDAB online
at “http://www.worlddab.org/” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.
display.
DAB
The DAB service
reception is weak.
The positioning of the indoor DAB
antenna and/or this unit is not optimal
for DAB reception.
Use the tuning aid feature to locate the best
positioning of the DAB antenna and this unit
for optimal DAB reception.
The DAB signals are too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
—
—
There is noise
The indoor DAB antenna needs to be
repositioned.
Readjust the position of the indoor DAB
antenna.
interference (e.g. hiss
or crackle).
The DAB signals are too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
—
—
The DAB service
information does not
appear or is
The DAB service may be temporarily
out of service, or the DAB service
information is not provided by the
DAB broadcaster.
inaccurate.
115 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Remote control
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF
REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this
manual.
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
The library code of the remote control and Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.
corresponding remote control library code.
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
■ iPod
Note
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
Connect error
Try resetting your iPod.
—
—
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
Unknown type
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
iPod connected
Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
Disconnected
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
—
Unable to play
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
116 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Network and USB
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The PC server/MCX-2000/
Internet radio does not
function properly.
The IP address is not set properly.
Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration
according to the current operating environment.
The network cable is not connected.
Connect it properly.
—
The music in the PC
server cannot be played
back.
The PC does not have Windows Media
Connect 2.0 installed in it.
Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC.
The music is recorded in a format that
cannot be played on this unit. This unit
cannot play music formats other than
WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format).
Also note that it cannot play certain
music files even if these are recorded in
the WMA, MP3 or WAV format.
Play music recorded in a format that this unit is
compatible with.
—
The music is copyright-protected.
This unit cannot play copyright-protected music.
—
—
Windows Media Connect
2.0 cannot be connected.
The Windows XP PC is logging on to a
domain.
Log on to the local machine instead of the
domain.
The MusicCAST server
cannot be connected.
You are attempting to connect to
MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that
can be connected by this unit is
MCX-2000.
Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.
—
Auto Configuration is not executed.
Execute “Auto Configure”.
—
The Internet radio cannot
be played.
The firewall of the network device is
activated. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the
port designated by each radio station.
The port number is variable depending
on radio station.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
Connection to the Internet is
disconnected.
Check the configuration of the network device,
and then contact the network connection provider.
—
—
—
The music files and
directories in the USB
device cannot be viewed.
The music files and directories are placed Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
in locations other than the FAT area.
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
The USB device cannot
be recognized.
The connected USB device is other than
a USB mass storage class USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage
class USB memory device or USB portable audio
player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain
USB devices even when they are devices as
described above.
Some devices may become easier to recognize
when they are inserted before turning this unit on.
“Disconnected” is
displayed even when a
USB device is present.
This unit recognized the USB device as
an illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
117 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your network.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
—
Please wait
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
—
This unit is in the middle of waking up
MCX-2000 that has been set to the
standby mode.
Wait for approximately 20 seconds.
—
Please wait
(Starting Server)
There is a problem with the signal path
from your network to this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and the
LAN port on your router or hub.
Connect error
Make sure your router is properly connected and
turned on. Also, make sure your modem is
properly connected and turned on when you are
attempting to listen to Internet radio.
Your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player has been
disconnected from the USB port of this
unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB memory device or USB portable audio
player.
—
Disconnected
The PC server or MCX-2000 previously
connected to this unit no longer exists.
Connect this unit to the available PC server or
MCX-2000.
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
—
This unit cannot access your USB
memory device or USB portable audio
player.
Try another USB memory device or USB portable
audio player.
Access error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
—
—
—
—
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your PC.
Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is
installed on your PC.
Unable to play
Check that the songs currently stored on your PC
are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV).
Store some other playable music files (MP3,
WMA, and WAV) on your PC.
The network may be overloaded with
Try preparing a network exclusively for use with
heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted. this unit to separate it from general network
traffic.
The list of the contents stored on your PC
server or MCX-2000 has been updated.
List updated
Bookmark ON
Bookmark OFF
The desired Internet radio station has
been added to the “Bookmarks” list.
The stored Internet radio station has been
removed from the “Bookmarks” list.
118 En
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY
■ Dolby Surround
Audio information
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD video.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-
over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and
LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).
This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to the existing 5.1-channel format.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
119 En
GLOSSARY
■ LFE 0.1 channel
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
■ MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which
achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be
capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11
(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to
music CD.
■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the
method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. It does not specify the
compression (coding) method so a desired compression
method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible
with the PCM method (no compression) and some
compression methods including the ADPCM method.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ WMA
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression
method, which achieves a high compression rate by
thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human
ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data
quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a
similar audio quality to music CD.
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
120 En
GLOSSARY
Video information
Sound field program information
■ Component video signal
■ CINEMA DSP
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
121 En
GLOSSARY
*
*
*
*
223.936 MHz
225.648 MHz
227.360 MHz
229.072 MHz
230.784 MHz
232.496 MHz
234.208 MHz
235.776 MHz
237.488 MHz
239.200 MHz
12A
12B
12C
12D
13A
13B
13C
13D
13E
13F
DAB frequency information
■ Band III
Note
When you select “UK BAND3” in the initial scan operation, this
unit scans only within the frequencies marked with an asterisk (*)
Frequency
174.928 MHz
Channel label
5A
176.640 MHz
178.352 MHz
180.064 MHz
181.936 MHz
183.648 MHz
185.360 MHz
187.072 MHz
188.928 MHz
190.640 MHz
192.352 MHz
194.064 MHz
195.936 MHz
197.648 MHz
199.360 MHz
201.072 MHz
202.928 MHz
204.640 MHz
206.352 MHz
208.064 MHz
209.936 MHz
211.648 MHz
213.360 MHz
215.072 MHz
216.928 MHz
218.640 MHz
220.352 MHz
222.064 MHz
5B
5C
5D
■ L-Band
6A
Frequency
Channel label
6B
1452.960 MHz
1454.672 MHz
1456.384 MHz
1458.096 MHz
1459.808 MHz
1461.520 MHz
1463.232 MHz
1464.944 MHz
1466.656 MHz
1468.368 MHz
1470.080 MHz
1471.792 MHz
1473.504 MHz
1475.216 MHz
1476.928 MHz
1478.640 MHz
1480.352 MHz
1482.064 MHz
1483.776 MHz
1485.488 MHz
1487.200 MHz
1488.912 MHz
1490.624 MHz
LA
LB
LC
LD
LE
LF
LG
LH
LI
6C
6D
7A
7B
7C
7D
8A
8B
8C
LJ
8D
LK
LL
LM
LN
LO
LP
LQ
LR
LS
LT
9A
9B
9C
9D
10A
10B
10C
10D
11A
11B
11C
11D
*
*
*
LU
LV
LW
122 En
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range ................................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω........................................ 95 W
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 130/165/195/240 W
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
• Maximum Output Power
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω.........................................................145 W
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
• IEC Output Power
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω.......................................................105 W
• Damping Factor
AM SECTION
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 120 or more
• Tuning Range ........................................................ 531 to 1611 kHz
• Maximum Input Voltage
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.2 V or more
• Frequency Response
DAB SECTION
CD, etc. .................................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
V-AUX ..................................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, –3 dB
• Tuning Range
(Band III) ............................................................. 174 to 240 MHz
(L-Band) .......................................................... 1452 to 1492 MHz
• Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)
............................................................................... 0.06% or less
• Sensitivity
(Band III) ........................................................................ –99 dBm
(L-Band) ......................................................................... –95 dBm
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 97 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion ..................................................... 0.01%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ........................................................ 95dB
• Frequency Response ................................ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.5 dB
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 kΩterminated) to Front L/R .......... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
GENERAL
BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... 10 dB/60 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. 10 dB/20 kHz
• Power Supply ........................................................ AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption .............................................................. 360 W
• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less
• AC Outlets ....................................................... 1 (100 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 393 mm
• Weight .................................................................................. 11.9 kg
• Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. .................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ................................................ 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
OUT (REC)............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ............................................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 2 OUT ....................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Volume Control........................... Mute/–80 dB to +16 dB/1 dB step
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format (Gray Back) ......................................................... PAL
• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL
• Rated Input Voltage
GPL/LGPL
Composite ...................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video (Y) .................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video (C) ...........................................................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component (Y) ...........................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component (PB, PR) ..................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
This product includes software code subject to the GNU General
Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License
(LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is
licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source
code is available at the following website:
• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more
http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a
CD-ROM) at actual cost.
Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION,
10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan
In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of
purchase.
123 En
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections
of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do
not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
and every part regardless of who wrote it.
■
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and
change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its
users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s
software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the
Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3.
You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2)
in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute
copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source
code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in
new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any
third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing
source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you
must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute
corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this
license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone
understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is
not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
original authors’ reputations.
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source
code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid
the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses,
in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
4.
5.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as
expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long
as such parties remain in full compliance.
0.
This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed
by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or
work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or
works based on it.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and
the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that
is true depends on what the Program does.
6.
7.
Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this
License.
1.
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2.
You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in
part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run,
you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print
such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.)
APPENDIX-i
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
8.
If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
9.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more
useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you
want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a
version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
■
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our
free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of
the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
NO WARRANTY
Preamble
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS
NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change
it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated
software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully
about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy
to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute
copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source
code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in
new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must
provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the
library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them
these terms so they know their rights.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we
offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the library.
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can
redistribute and change under these terms.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for
the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the
original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced
by others.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the
start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each
file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is
found.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We
wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program
by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any
patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General
Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain
designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We
use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-
free programs.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original
library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the
entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place,
Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the
user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These
disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an
interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and
you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest
possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this,
non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free
library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General
Public License.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts
of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called
something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu
items–whatever suits your program.
APPENDIX-ii
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a
greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission
to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
3.
You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License
instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all
the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then
you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change
in these notices.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it
does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom
and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary
GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works
made from that copy.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay
close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that
uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter
must be combined with the library in order to run.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
4.
You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
0.
This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying
it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also
called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be
conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and
data) to form executables.
5.
A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is
designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
“work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term “modification”.)
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable
that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather
than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used
to control compilation and installation of the library.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the
Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even
though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this
to be true is not precisely defined by law.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is
not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute
a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing
it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that
uses the Library does.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then
the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall
under Section 6.)
1.
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library.
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code
for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also
fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6.
As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that
uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the
Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2.
You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it
and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of
this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include
the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the
work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-
readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so
that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user
who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be
supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its
purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is
entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires
that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if
the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square
roots.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A
suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library
already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library
functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified
version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version
is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of
that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of
who wrote it.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give
the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no
more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you
have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include
any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However,
as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library
(or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium
does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
APPENDIX-iii
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other
proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable
that you distribute.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
7.
You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side
in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,
and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of
the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed
under the terms of the Sections above.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a
work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8.
9.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work
based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and
change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively,
under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties with this License.
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach
them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of
warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where
the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a
library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either
by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places
the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
That’s all there is to it!
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option
of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license
version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
APPENDIX-iv
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
TORX
TOSHIBA
10003
11509
BT
BUBU SAT
BUSH
11296
10713
11284, 11471,
11672
CABLE TV RECEIVER
SATELLITE RECEIVER
ABC
10003
TRI-VISION 11257
UNITED CABLE
10003
UPC
US ELECTRONICS
10276
@SAT
@SKY
ABSAT
ADB
11300
11334
10713
10642, 11259,
11367, 11473,
11491
ADB
11230, 11269
AICHI DENSHI11512
CANAL DIGITAL
10853, 11622
10853
CANALSATELLITE
10853, 11339,
AMSTRAD
AUNA
AUSTAR
11222
11230, 11269
10276
11582
CANAL+
BIRMINGHAM
CABLE COMMUNICATIONS
10276
BRITISH TELECOM
10003
CABLE & WIRELESS
11068
AIWA
AKAI
11514, 11515
10200
11853
11457
11413
10114, 10713,
11334
10299, 10818,
11075, 11176,
11232
CABLE/PVR
COMBINATION
FRANCE TELECOM11734
FREEBOX
MOTOROLA 11106
NOKIA
NOOS
SUPERCABLE 10276
THOMSON
UPC
ALBA
ALLSAT
10713, 11284
10200, 11017,
11043
CENTREX
CGV
CHESS
ALLSONIC
ALLTECH
ALLVISION
10369
10713
11232, 11334,
11412
11482
CITYCOM
DX ANTENNA
11500, 11502
11569
11624
FASTWEB
FRANCE TELECOM
10817, 11734
11482
11497
11630
AMITRONICA 10713
COLOMBIA 10132
COLUMBIA 10132
COMAG
AMPERE
10132
11734
11582
AMSTRAD
10132, 10713,
10847, 10885,
11113, 11175
10713
10132, 11232,
FREEBOX
FUJITSU
11366, 11412,
11413, 11579
10369
10132, 10369
11457
10200
10873
10713, 11111,
11296, 11743
11075
DBS/PVR
COMBINATION
@SAT
ATSAT
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
10003, 10276
GOLDEN CHANNEL
11110
ANGLO
CONDOR
CONRAD
COSHIP
CYRUS
D-BOX
DAEWOO
ANKARO
10369, 10713,
11279
11300
11300
ANTSAT
ARCON
11017, 11083
11043, 11075,
11279
HOMECHOICE11590
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
JERROLD
MACAB
10003, 10276
10817
11175
CANALSATELLITE
11339
COMAG
DIGIFUSION 11645
DIRECTV
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
11237
ECHOSTAR
FORCE
FOXTEL
GBSAT
ARNION
ASAT
11300
10200
MADRITEL
MASPRO
11230
11510
DELTASAT
DGTEC
DIGENIUS
DIGIALITY
DIGIFUSION 11645
DIGIQUEST 11457, 11473
DIGISAT
DIGISKY
DIGITALL WORLD
11227
DIJAM
DIRECTV
DISTRATEL 10885, 11283,
11704
DMT
DNT
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
11237
DUNE
ASCI
10114, 11334,
11461
11242
10299, 11161
11685
11412
MOTOROLA 10276, 11106,
11483
ASLF
10713
10099, 10639
MR ZAP
MR. ZAP
NEC
11112
11112
11496
ASSCOM
ASTON
ASTRA
ASTRO
10853
11129
10713
10133, 10173,
10369, 10658,
11099, 11100,
11113
11232
11457
10610
11194
11356
11214
11176, 11427,
11670, 11675
11221, 11561
11334
11310, 11311
11412
NOKIA
NOOS
NTL
11569
10817, 11624
10003, 11060,
11068
11296
10099, 10639
HUMAX
ONO
11068
ATSAT
ATSKY
11300
11334
OPTUS
PACE
10276
11060, 11068,
11577
KATHREIN
MAXIMUM
NOKIA
OPENTEL
PACE
AUDIOLINE 11429
AURORA
AUSTAR
10879
10642, 10879,
11259
11075
10200
PANASONIC 10375, 11488
PHILIPS
10817
11423, 11623
PIONEER
PVP STEREO
11021, 11500
AXIS
10369, 11111
PANASONIC 11320
B@YTRONIC 11412
BENTLEY WALKER
11017
10369
PHILIPS
REBOX
SAGEM
10099
11214
11253, 11307,
11692
11489
11657
11175, 11848,
11850
11412
10639
VISUAL MATRIX
10003
DX ANTENNA 11530
ECHOSTAR
10167, 10610,
SAGEM
10817, 11112,
11624
BEST
BIG SAT
10369
11457
10713, 10853,
11200, 11323,
11409, 11467,
11473, 11477
10132, 10713
10587, 10713,
11129, 11567
10713
SHARP
SIEMENS
SKY
SAMSUNG
SATBOX
11060, 11666
10375
BLACK DIAMOND
11284
BLAUPUNKT 10173
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
11510
EINHELL
ELAP
BLUE SKY
BOCA
10713
SKYPLUS
SONY
STRONG
THOMSON
TOPFIELD
TPS
SONY
STARCOM
11460
10003
10132, 10713,
11232, 11366,
11474
ELSAT
ELTA
EMME ESSE 10369
EMTECH
ENGEL
11300
SUMITOMO 11500, 11503,
11504
SUPERCABLE
10276
TELE DANMARK
11016
10200, 10369
11534, 11900
11206, 11545
11253, 11307
11075, 11412
BOSTON
11251
BRAINWAVE 10658
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
10847, 11175
11214
10713, 11017,
11251
ZEHNDER
BROCO
BSKYB
10713
10847, 11175
TELEWEST
THOMSON
11068
11110, 11734
APPENDIX-v
EURIEULT
EUROLINE
EUROPHON 10132, 10299
10885
11251
JAEGER
JVC
11334
11507, 11531,
11532
10713
10713
MICRO
MICRO ELEKTRONIC
10713
MICROMAXX 10299, 10369
MICROSTAR 11075
MICROTEC
MORGAN'S
10713
PMB
PREISNER
10713
10132, 10262,
11113, 11366
10292
10292, 10873,
11429
EUROSKY
10114, 10132,
10262, 10299,
10369
10818, 10898
10713
K-SAT
KAMM
KAON
KATELCO
KATHREIN
PREMIER
PREMIERE
11300
11111
10713
EUROSTAR
EUTELSAT
FENNER
FERGUSON 10711, 11291
FINLUX 10573
FLAIR MATE 10713
10132, 10200,
10713, 11232,
11412
PRIMACOM 11111
10114, 10173,
10200, 10249,
10442, 10480,
10504, 10553,
10622, 10658,
10713, 10818,
10898, 11221,
11416, 11561,
11567
10125
10853
10132
10114
QUADRAL
QUELLE
RADIOLA
RADIX
RCA
REBOX
RED STAR
REGAL
RFT
ROADSTAR
ROVER
S-ZWO
SAB
10369
10299
10200
11113
11291
11214
10369
11251
10200, 10541
10713, 10853
10369, 10713
11207
11251
10885
10820, 11114,
11253, 11307,
11690, 11691,
11692, 11694
10853, 11017,
11206, 11243,
11293, 11458,
11570
10369, 10713
MULTICHOICE10642, 10879
MYRYAD
MYSAT
NEC
NEOTION
NETGEM
NETSAT
NEUF TELECOM
11322
NEUF TV
NEUHAUS
NEULING
NEUSAT
10200
10713
11270, 11519
11334
11322
FMD
FORCE
11457
11194
FORTEC STAR 11017, 11083
FOXTEL 10879, 11356
FRACARRO 10125
FTEMAXIMAL10369, 10713,
11556
10099
KENNEX
KENWOOD
KEY WEST
KITON
KOSCOM
KOSMOS
KREILING
11322
10713
10132, 11232
10587, 10713,
11279
FUBA
10173, 10262,
10299, 10369,
10573, 11161,
11214
11043
10442
10114, 10249,
10658, 11461
SABA
SAGEM
FUGIONKYO 10125
GALAXIS
NEVELING
NEXTWAVE 11017
NIKKO
NOKIA
11161
10369, 10853,
11111, 11557
10818
11075
11214
KREISELMEYER
10173
L&S ELECTRONIC
10132, 10369,
10200, 10713
SAMSUNG
GARDINER
GARNET
GBSAT
10573, 10751,
10853, 10873,
11023, 11223,
11310, 11311,
11723
11043, 11334
11296
10132, 10173,
10299, 10369
11461
10369, 10713
11611
11075, 11226
10132, 10299,
10369, 10713,
11043
GECCO
11157, 11273,
11412
LABGEAR
LASAT
SANYO
SAT CONTROL11300
SAT TEAM
SATEC
SATELCO
SATPLUS
SATSTATION 11083
SCHAUB LORENZ
11214
SCHNEIDER 11206, 11251
SCHWAIGER 10132, 10504,
10587, 10885,
11219
GENERAL SATELLITE
11176
GF
GF STAR
GLOBO
GOD DIGITAL 10200
GOLD BOX
GOLDEN INTERSTAR
11283
GOLDVISION 11017
GOODMANS 11246, 11284
GRUNDIG
NORDMENDE 11611
10713
10713
10369, 11232
11100
LEMON
LENCO
LENOXX
LG
OKANO
OPENTEL
OPTEX
10442
11043
11043
11251, 11626
11232, 11412
10114, 10713,
11043, 11283
10879
11232, 11334,
11412
10114, 10541,
11099, 11100
11232
10200, 10329,
10720, 10847,
10853, 10867,
11175, 11323,
11423, 11623,
11850
LIFESAT
OPTUS
ORBIS
10292, 10853
LIFETEC
LODOS
LOGIX
LORENZEN 10132, 10299,
10867, 11161,
10587
11284
11017, 11075
ORBITECH
P/SAT
PACE
11075, 11083,
11111, 11334,
11412, 11457,
11474
10173, 10847,
10853, 10879,
11291
11579
10369
10573
11681
11557
10132, 10713
HAENSEL & GRETEL
10132
HANDAN
HANSEATIC 11099, 11100
HAUPPAUGE 11672
HB
LUPUS
LUXOR
LUXORIT
M VISION
MANATA
MANHATTAN 11017, 11083
MARANTZ
MASPRO
SCS
10299
SEDEA ELECTRONIQUE
10125, 10132,
11622
PACIFIC
PACKARD BELL
11111
11284
11206, 11283
SEG
10114, 10369,
11075, 11251,
11626
10885
10610
10713, 11251
10541, 11489,
11513, 11517
10173, 11657
10299
10713
10587
10713
11449
10099, 10847,
11175, 11848,
11849, 11850
11214
11011
11279
HDT
HE@D
10200
PALCOM
10299, 10587,
11161, 11409
10879
10173, 10713,
11520, 11530
10173, 11284
11075, 11334,
11685
SEPTIMO
SERINO
SERVISAT
SHARP
HIRSCHMANN10125, 10173,
10299, 10369,
PANASAT
PANASONIC 10847, 11104,
11304, 11320,
MATSUI
MAXIMUM
10573, 11111,
11232, 11412
11404, 11508,
11526, 11527,
11528
10173
11011
10132
10099, 10133,
10173, 10200,
10292, 10818,
10853, 10898,
11114, 11118,
11672
HITACHI
HUMAX
11250, 11284,
11518, 11523,
11525
11176, 11225,
11427, 11648,
11670, 11675,
11743
10132, 11017,
11075
11011, 11075
11367
MDS
11225
SIEMENS
SILVA
SKANTIN
SKARDIN
SKR
MEDIACOM 11206
MEDIASAT
MEDION
10292, 10853
PANDA
10132, 10299,
10369, 10713,
11043, 11075,
11232, 11334,
11412, 11626
10713
PANSAT
PATRIOT
PHILIPS
SKT
SKY
HUTH
MEDISON
MEGA
MELECTRONIC
10818
HYUNDAI
ICAN
ID DIGITAL 11176
ILLUSION SAT11557
IMPERIAL
INGELEN
INTERNATIONAL
10132
INTERSTAR 11017, 11214
10200
SKY ITALIA 11848, 11849
SKY XL
SKY+
SKYMASTER 10587, 10713,
11075, 11200,
11251, 11412
11175
PHONOTREND11017, 11200
PILOTIME
PINO
METRONIC
10132, 10713,
10818, 10885,
11279, 11283,
11334, 11691,
11704
11339
11334
10292, 10329,
10352, 10853,
11308
11429
10114
PIONEER
11409, 11611
10200
11232, 11334,
11412
SKYMAX
SKYPLUS
METZ
10173
PLASMATIC 10442
APPENDIX-vi
SKYSAT
SKYVISION 11334
SL
10114, 10713
TOPFIELD
11206, 11207,
11208, 11545,
11722
MIND
NIVEUS MEDIA
11272
11272
ANSONIC
20009, 20292,
20370, 20668
10132, 10299
APEX DIGITAL20890, 21217
SM ELECTRONIC
TOSHIBA
TPS
11501, 11516,
11530
10820, 11253,
11307
NORTHGATE 11272
PACKARD BELL
11272
PINNACLE SYSTEMS
11447
ARDEM
ARISTONA
ART
ASORA
ASUKA
20037, 20714
20037, 20556
21037
20009
20218, 20264
10587, 10713,
11200, 11409
10132, 10299,
10713, 11113,
11157, 11232,
11273, 11413
10282, 10292,
10639, 10847,
10853, 11524,
11558
SMART
SONY
TRIAD
TRIAX
10372
10114, 10132,
10200, 10713,
10853, 11099,
11113, 11157,
11227, 11251,
11291, 11296
11429
10713
10713
10879
11521
PIONEER
11010
AUDIOSONIC 20009, 20037,
20109, 20218,
RICAVISION 11272
SHARP
SONY
STACK 9
11010
11272, 11733
11272
20264, 20370,
20374, 20486,
20714, 20715
20264, 20486
SYSTEMAX 11272
AUDIOTON
AUDIOWORLD20698
AWA
SR
10132
TT-MICRO
TURNSAT
TWINNER
UEC
UNIDEN
UNISAT
UNITED
TOSHIBA
TOUCH
11272
11272
STARLITE
STREAM
STRONG
10200
11848
20009, 20108,
VIEWSONIC 11272
20606
20009
20208
10125, 10132,
10369, 10713,
10820, 10853,
10879, 11146,
11157, 11258,
11300, 11409,
11430, 11626
11300
VOODOO
ZT GROUP
11272
11272
AXXENT
BAIRD
BANG & OLUFSEN
20565
BASIC LINE 20009, 20037,
20218, 20374,
10132, 10200
11251
TV
UNIVERSUM 10114, 10173,
10299, 11099,
A.R. SYSTEMS20374, 20455
11251
ACER
21339
20455, 20556,
20668, 21037,
21163
20805
20037, 20361,
20512
SUNNY
VAN HUNEN 11161
VARIOSAT
VEGA
VENTANA
VESTEL
VISIONIC
ACURA
ADL
20009
21217
SUNNY SOUND
10369
10173
10369
10200
ADMIRAL
20093, 20163,
20264
BAUER
BAUR
SUNSAT
10713
SUNSTAR
10132, 10369,
10642
10114, 11251
10125, 11279,
11283
10114, 10713,
11129, 11457
10818
10173, 10299,
10372, 10406,
10638
ADVENT
AGB
20817
20516
BEAUMARK 20178
BEKO
SYSTEC
TARBS
11334
11225
AIKO
AIM
20009, 20264
20805
20037, 20370,
VISIOSAT
20418, 20486,
20606, 20714,
20715, 20808,
21037
20698
20037, 20418
20668
TBOSTON
TEAC
11457
11225, 11227,
11251, 11322
AIWA
AKAI
21180
VTECH
WISI
20009, 20035,
20037, 20163,
20178, 20208,
20218, 20264,
20361, 20371,
20433, 20473,
20480, 20516,
20548, 20556,
20602, 20606,
20631, 20696,
20714, 20715,
20729, 20745,
20753, 21207
20037, 20218,
20455
TECHNISAT 10114, 10200,
10262, 10541,
11099, 11100,
11322
TECHNOMATE
11283, 11610
TECHNOSONIC
11672
TECHNOTREND
11429
BELSON
BEON
BERTHEN
BESTAR
WISPLUS
WORLDSAT 10114, 11214,
11251, 11323
XRYPTON
XSAT
11258
20037, 20370,
20374
10369
BESTAR-DAEWOO
20374
BLACK DIAMOND
20614, 20821,
21037, 21909
BLAUPUNKT 20170, 20195,
20200, 20327,
10713, 10847,
11214, 11323
11300
XTREME
YAKUMO
ZEHNDER
11413
TECHNOWELT10132
10114, 10369,
10504, 10818,
11075, 11232,
11251, 11334,
11412, 11413
TECHSAN
TECHWOOD 10114, 11284
TEKCOMM 11017
11017
AKIBA
20455
AKITO
20037
BLUE SKY
20037, 20218,
20455, 20487,
20556, 20668,
20714, 20715,
20808, 21037,
21191
21388
20009
20736
20037, 20896
20109, 20335,
20560, 20625,
20714
TELE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC
11611
AKURA
20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20412, 20668,
20714, 21037,
21982
TELECIEL
TELEKA
11043
10262
HDTV DECORDER
PIONEER
SHARP
TELESTAR
10114, 11099,
11100, 11251,
11334
11010
11010
ALBA
20009, 20037,
20163, 20218,
20355, 20371,
20418, 20443,
20487, 20668,
20714, 21037
20865
BLUESKY
BOOTS
BOXLIGHT
BPL
TELESYSTEM 11251, 11409
OTHER VIDEO
ACCESSORIES
TELETECH
TELEVES
10114
10132, 11214,
11300
BRANDT
ABS
11272
TELEWIRE
TEVEBOX
TEVION
11232
11681
10713, 11409,
11622
ALL-TEL
ALLSTAR
ALIENWARE 11272
CYBERPOWER11272
GATEWAY
HAUPPAUGE 11408
HEWLETT PACKARD
11272
HOWARD COMPUTERS
11272
HP
HUSH
IBUYPOWER 11272
LINKSYS 11272
MEDIA CENTER PC
11272
20037
BRINKMANN 20037, 20418,
20486, 20668
BTC
AMPLIVISION 20370
11272
AMSTRAD
20009, 20037,
20218
THOMSON
10292, 10711,
10713, 10820,
10847, 10853,
11046, 11175,
11291, 11498,
11534, 11900
11672
20218, 20264,
20371, 20412,
20433, 20516,
21037
BUSH
20009, 20037,
20208, 20218,
20264, 20355,
20361, 20371,
20374, 20487,
20556, 20614,
20617, 20660,
20668, 20698,
20714, 20778,
21037, 21243
21309, 21311
ANAM
20009, 20250
11272
11272
ANAM NATIONAL2
0250
ANDERSSON 21149, 21163
TINY
TIOKO
TOKAI
TONNA
10132
10200
10587, 10713,
11611
ANGLO
ANITECH
20009, 20264
20009, 20037
BYDESIGN
MICROSOFT 11272
APPENDIX-vii
CANTON
CARAD
20218
20610, 20668,
21037
20037, 20455
20054, 20170
20009, 20037
20037
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
20698
FIRSTLINE
20009, 20037,
20208, 20361,
20374, 20411,
20556, 20668,
20714, 20808,
21037, 21191,
21307, 21363,
21388
20208, 20370,
20555
20037, 20218,
20264, 20455,
20610
GRANADA
GRANDIN
20037, 20108,
20163, 20208,
20226, 20473,
20516, 20548,
20560
20009, 20037,
20163, 20374,
20455, 20610,
20668, 20714,
20715, 20865,
20880, 21037,
21191, 21374,
21388
DIGATRON
DIGILINE
20037
20105, 20668
CARENA
CARVER
CASCADE
CASIO
CATHAY
CCE
CELEBRITY 20000
CELESTIAL 20820, 20821
CENTREX
CENTRUM
DIGITAL LIFE 20780, 20872,
20891
DIGITOR
DIGIX
20037, 20698
20880
20037
20037
DIXI
DL
20009, 20037
20891
FISHER
FLINT
DMTECH
DOMEOS
DOMLAND
21338
20668
20394
20780
21037
CENTURION 20037
CGE 20074, 20370,
20418
CHANGHONG 20821
DREAM VISION
21704
FORCE
21149
20037
20093
GRUNDIG
20037, 20195,
20443, 20487,
20556, 20587,
20740, 21223
20808
FORMENTI
FORTRESS
FRABA
DSE
20698
DUAL
20037, 20352,
20394
20037, 20370
20009, 20037,
20370, 20610
20009, 20163,
20264
20865
20009, 20683,
20853
CIMLINE
CITIZEN
CITY
20009, 20218
FRIAC
H&B
HAIER
20060
20009
20037
DVX
20891
20698, 20891
DYNATRON 20037
FRONTECH
HALLMARK 20178
HANIMEX 20218
HANSEATIC 20009, 20037,
20361, 20377,
CLARIVOX
E-ELITE
ECCO
20218
20773
CLATRONIC 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
FUJIMARO
FUJITSU
EDISON-MINERVA
20487
20370, 20371,
20394, 20556,
20606, 20714
21037
20009, 20037,
20264, 20370,
20411, 20418
20754
EIKI
ELBE
20735
FUJITSU GENERAL
20009, 20683
FUJITSU SIEMENS
21298
20634, 20714,
20808
HANTAREX 20009, 20037,
20516, 20829,
20865, 21338
20037
HARMAN/KARDON
20054
CLAYTON
CONDOR
20292, 20411,
20435, 20516,
20610
ELBE-SHARP 20516
ELECTROBAND
20000
ELECTROGRAPH
21755
FUNAI
20264, 20668
20037
20037, 20370
21755, 21756
20009, 20218,
20374
CONIA
CONRAC
CONTEC
GALAXI
GALAXIS
GATEWAY
GBC
HANTOR
20808
20009, 20037
CONTINENTAL EDISON
20109, 20487
HARSPER
HARWA
20865
20773, 21196,
21269
20009, 20037,
20412, 20487
20093
20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20412, 20418
20865
20009
20218
20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20355
20218, 20455,
20610, 20714
20508, 20556,
20780, 21363
20037, 20105,
20108, 20109,
20145, 20163,
20178, 20225,
20473, 20480,
20481, 20492,
20516, 20548,
20578, 20634,
20744, 20797,
21037, 21149,
21194, 21576
ELEKTA
ELIN
20264
COSMEL
CROSLEY
CROWN
20037
20009, 20037,
20361, 20548
20218
20009, 20264
20037, 20178,
20361, 20370,
20371, 20486,
20714, 21909
21365
20037
20037
20001, 20009
20264
20037, 20264
20037
GE
20093, 20178,
20560, 20625,
20735
20054, 20074
20009, 20037,
20053, 20208,
20370, 20412,
20418, 20486,
20487, 20606,
20712, 20714,
20715, 21037
HARWOOD
ELITE
ELTA
EMERSON
GEC
20037, 20163,
20361, 20516
20009, 20374
HAVERMY
HCM
GELOSO
GENERAL TECHNIC
20009
HELIOS
HEMA
HIKONA
HINARI
ENVISION
ERRES
ESC
GENESIS
20009
CS ELECTRONICS
20218
CURTIS MATHES
20054, 20060,
20093, 20145
CYBERTRON 20218
GENEXXA
20009, 20163,
20218
ETRON
GERICOM
20808, 20865,
20880, 21206,
21217, 21298
EUROFEEL
EUROMAN
EUROPA
EUROPHON 20516
EVOLUTION 21756
EXQUISIT
FENNER
FERGUSON 20037, 20053,
20109, 20195,
HISAWA
HISENSE
HITACHI
GOLDFUNK 20668
CYTRONIX
D-VISION
DAEWOO
21298
20556
GOLDSTAR
20001, 20037,
20109, 20163,
20178, 20361,
20377, 20606,
20714, 20715
20487
20009, 20037,
20218, 20374,
20556, 20634,
20865, 20880,
21307, 21909
20218
20009, 20035,
20037, 20208
20412
20037
20009, 20374
GOODING
20335, 20443,
20548, 20560,
20625, 21037
20037, 20163,
20264, 20361,
20371, 20412,
20512
GOODMANS 20009, 20035,
20037, 20218,
DAINICHI
DANSAI
20264, 20335,
20360, 20371,
20374, 20480,
20487, 20516,
FIDELITY
DANSETTE
DANTAX
DAVIS
20714, 20715
20736
20556, 20560,
DAYTEK
DAYTON
DAYTRON
DE GRAAF
DECCA
DENKO
DENON
DENVER
21207
20009, 21207
20374
20208, 20548
20037, 20516
20264
20145, 20511
20037, 20587,
21189
FINLANDIA 20163, 20208,
20346, 20548
20634, 20668,
20714, 20808,
20880, 21037,
21163, 21909
20370
20218
HITACHI FUJIAN
20108
FINLUX
20037, 20105,
20346, 20411,
20473, 20480,
20492, 20516,
20631, 20714,
20715, 20808
HITSU
20009, 20218,
20455, 20610
20714, 20865
GORENJE
GPM
HOEHER
HOME ELECTRONICS
20606
HORNYPHON 20037
GRADIENTE 20053, 20170
GRAETZ
20163, 20361,
20371, 20487,
20714
HUANYU
HUGOSON
HUMAX
HYPER
20374
20890, 21217
21295
DESMET
DIAMANT
DIAMOND
20009, 20037
20037
20825
20009
APPENDIX-viii
HYPSON
20037, 20264,
20455, 20668,
20714, 20715,
21037
20860, 20865,
20876, 21152,
21244, 21294
20037
20218, 20264,
20371
20218
20877, 21217
20037, 20074,
20370, 20418
20037
KENNEDY
KENNEX
KIOTA
KITON
KNEISSEL
20435
21037
20001
MARANTZ
MARK
20037, 20054,
20412, 20556,
20704
20037, 20714,
20715
20009, 20218
20009, 20035,
20037, 20195,
20208, 20335,
20355, 20371,
20433, 20443,
20455, 20487,
20516, 20556,
20714, 21037
NATIONAL
NEC
20226
20009, 20053,
20156, 20170,
20374, 20455,
20587, 20704,
21704
20037, 20668
20037, 20292,
20374, 20411,
20435, 20556,
20610
20037, 20218,
20371, 20418,
20587, 20641,
20714, 20754
20487
20037
20009
20876
20412, 20418
20163
HYUNDAI
MASUDA
MATSUI
NECKERMANN
20037, 20200,
IBERIA
ICE
KONKA
20327, 20370,
20411, 20418,
20556
20037, 20371
20865, 20876,
21206, 21318,
21338, 21371,
21373, 21376,
21390
ICES
IIYAMA
IMPERIAL
NEI
NEOVIA
KONTAKT
KORPEL
KOYODA
KREISEN
KYOSHU
KYOTO
INDIANA
INFINITY
INFOCUS
MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650
20054
MAXENT
MEDIATOR
MEDION
21755
20037
20736, 20752,
21164, 21206
20163, 20487,
20610, 20714
20037, 20512,
20556, 20668,
20698, 20714,
20808, 20880,
21037, 21248
20610
NETSAT
NETTV
NEUFUNK
20037
21755
INGELEN
L&S ELECTRONIC
20714, 20808
20037, 20218,
20556, 20610,
20714
20009, 20035,
20037, 20218,
20264
INGERSOLL 20009
INNO HIT
LASAT
LEADER
LECSON
LEMAIR
LENCO
LEYCO
LG
20486
20009
20037
20411
20037, 20374
20037, 20264
20037, 20178,
20442, 20556,
20698, 20714,
20715, 20829,
21146, 21148,
21191
20009, 20516,
21163
20865, 21298
20037, 20264
MEGAS
NIKKAI
INNOWERT
INTERBUY
INTERFUNK 20037, 20163,
20200, 20327,
MEGATRON 20145, 20178
MEI 21037
MELECTRONIC
20009, 20037,
NIKKO
NOKIA
20178
20163, 20208,
20346, 20361,
20374, 20473,
20480, 20548,
20606, 20610,
20631
20361, 20512
20037, 21909
20105, 20163,
20195, 20346,
20374, 20411,
20480, 20492,
20512, 20634,
20714
20009, 20060,
20178, 20250,
21037
INTERNAL
INTERVISION 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20377, 20394,
20455, 20486,
20487
20218, 20371
20037, 20218,
20455
LIESENK & TTER
20037
LIESENKOTTER
20037, 20327
NORCENT
NORDMENDE 20037, 20109,
20195, 20560,
21365
MEMOREX
IRRADIO
ISUKAI
20714
LIFETEC
20037, 20218,
20374, 20668,
20714, 21037
MERCURY
METRONIC
METZ
20009
20625
NORMEREL 20037
NOVATRONIC 20037, 20105,
20374
ITS
ITT
20264, 20371
20163, 20208,
20346, 20361,
20473, 20480,
20548, 20610
20163, 20208,
20346, 20361,
20473, 20480,
20548, 20606,
20610
20037, 20264,
20374
20877
20054
20000
20037, 20367,
20388, 20447,
20587, 20668,
20746, 21163
20178
LOCAL INDIA TV
20264, 20371,
OCEANIC
20163, 20208,
20361, 20473,
20548
20009, 20037,
20370
20264
20891
20714
20218, 20371,
20433
20602
21037
ITT NOKIA
LODOS
LOEWE
MGA
OKANO
20037, 20136,
20292, 20512,
20516, 20633,
20790
20001, 20773,
20880, 21217
20668
MICROMAXX 20037, 20668,
20808, 21037
MICROSTAR 20808
MIKOMI
MINATO
MINERVA
OMEGA
OMNI
ONIMAX
ONWA
21149
20037
20108, 20487,
20516
20412
ITV
LOGIK
IX
JBL
JCB
JDV
JENSEN
JMB
LOGIX
LUKER
LUMA
LUX MAY
LUXOR
OPTIMUS
OPTONICA
ORION
20250, 20650
20093
21982
21037
MINOKA
MITSUBISHI 20037, 20093,
20108, 20178,
20037, 20355,
20412, 20443,
20516, 20556,
20714, 20880
20037, 20218
20668, 21037
20516
20037, 20218,
20264, 20355,
20374, 20412,
20556
21982
20817
20443, 20556,
20634
20712
20009, 20037
20163, 20208,
20361, 20473,
20480, 20548,
20631, 21037,
21163
20250, 20512,
20556, 21037
20292, 20516,
20609
20009
MIVAR
ORLINE
ORMOND
ORSOWE
OSAKI
JOCEL
JUBILEE
JVC
20556
MONACO
MORGAN'S
MOTOROLA 20093
MTC
20053, 20093,
20218, 20371,
20418, 20606,
20650, 20653,
20683, 20731
20009, 20037,
20218, 20455
20163, 20361
20264, 20606,
20610, 20714,
20778
LXI
20054, 20156,
20178
20037
M ELECTRONIC
20009, 20037,
20060, 20370,
20512
20714
20037, 20486,
20668, 21037
20105, 20109,
20163, 20346,
20374, 20480
20037
MTLOGIC
MULTITEC
OSO
OSUME
OTTO VERSAND
20037, 20093,
20218
20037, 20218
KAISUI
KAPSCH
KARCHER
MADISON
MAGNADYNE 20516
MAGNAFON 20516
MAGNAVOX 20054, 20780
MULTITECH 20009, 20037,
20264, 20486
MURPHY
20109, 20226,
20361, 20512,
20556
20163
MUSIKLAND 20218
KATHREIN
KAWA
KB ARISTOCRAT
20163
20556
20371
MAGNUM
20037, 20714,
20715
20035, 20037,
20264
MYRYAD
NAD
20556
20156, 20178,
20361
20037, 20606,
21982
20226
PACIFIC
20443, 20556,
20714, 21037
MANESTH
PALLADIUM 20037, 20370,
20411, 20418,
NAIKO
NAT
KENDO
20037, 20411,
20610
MANHATTAN 20037, 20668,
20778, 21037
20714
APPENDIX-ix
PALSONIC
PANAMA
PANASHIBA 20001
PANASONIC 20037, 20163,
20226, 20250,
20001, 20037,
20264, 20418,
20698, 20773
20037, 20264
RADIOLA
RADIOMARELLI
20037, 20516
RADIOSHACK 20037, 20178
RADIOTONE 20009, 20037,
20264, 20412,
20037, 20556
SCHNEIDER 20037, 20163,
20218, 20352,
SOUND & VISION
20374
SOUNDESIGN 20178
SOUNDWAVE 20037, 20418,
20715
20361, 20371,
20394, 20556,
20668, 20714,
21037
SPECTRA
20009
20668, 21037
SCOTCH
20178
SSANGYONG 20009
STANDARD 20009, 20037,
20218, 20374,
20361, 20367,
20516, 20548,
20650, 20853,
21210, 21310
RCA
20093, 20625,
20679
SCOTLAND 20163
SCOTT
SEARS
20178
20054, 20156,
20178
REALISTIC
20178
21037
REDIFFUSION 20346, 20361,
20548
STARLITE
20009, 20037,
20264
PANAVISION 20037, 20411
PATHE CINEMA
20163
PAUSA
PENNEY
SEAWAY
SEELVER
SEG
20634
21037
REFLEX
20037, 20668,
21037
STENWAY
STERN
STEVISON
STRATO
20218
20163, 20411
21982
20009, 20037,
20264
20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20487, 20634,
20668, 21037,
21163
20009
20060, 20156,
20178
RELISYS
20865, 20876,
20877, 20878,
21206, 21207,
21268, 21298
20714
20037
20163, 20264,
20411
PERDIO
PHILCO
20037, 20163
20037, 20054,
20074, 20145,
20370, 20418
20009, 20037,
20054, 20200,
20361, 20374,
20556, 20772,
21756
STRONG
SUNKAI
21149, 21163
20355, 20455,
20487, 20610,
20865
REOC
REVOX
REX
SEI
20516
SEI-SINUDYNE
20037, 20516
20163, 20264,
20346, 20371,
20411, 20435
20156
PHILIPS
SELECO
SUNSTAR
20009, 20037,
20264, 20371
20037
RFT
RINEX
20037, 20264
20773
SUNWOOD
SUPERLA
ROADSTAR
20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20418, 20668,
20714, 21037,
21189
SEMP
20516
SENCORA
SENTRA
SERINO
20009
20035
20093, 20455,
20610
SUPERSCAN 20093
SUPERSONIC 21189
SUPERTECH 20009, 20037,
20218
PHOENIX
PHONOLA
PIONEER
20037, 20486
20037
20037, 20109,
20163, 20361,
20486, 20512,
20679, 20760
20486
ROVER
ROWA
20877
20698, 20712
SHARP
20053, 20093,
20200, 20491,
20516, 21163,
21193
SUPRA
SUPREME
SUSUMU
SVA
20009
20000
20218, 20335
20587, 20865,
20872
ROYAL LUX 20335, 20412
PIONIER
SABA
20109, 20163,
20250, 20335,
20361, 20498,
20516, 20548,
20560, 20625,
20714
PLANTRON 20009
PLAYSONIC 20037, 20714,
20715
POLAROID
PORTLAND 20374
POWERPOINT
SHENG CHIA 20093
SHINTOSHI 20037
SYLVANIA
SYSLINE
T+A
20054
20037
20447
SHIVAKI
SIAREM
SIEMENS
20037, 20443
20516
20037, 20195,
20200, 20327
20556
20865
TANDBERG 20367
SAGEM
SAISHO
SAIVOD
20455, 20610,
20830, 21313
20009, 20264,
20516
20037, 20668,
20712, 21037,
21163, 21982
20163
TANDY
20093, 20163,
20037, 20487,
20698
SIERA
SIESTA
SILVA
20218
20370
20037, 20361
TARGA
21307
PRANDONI-PRINCE
TASHIKO
TATUNG
20163
20037, 20516,
21756
20361, 20516
20264, 20412
21037
20361
20009, 20163,
20361
SILVA SCHNEIDER
20037
20361, 20715
SILVERCREST 21037
PRIMA
PRINSTON
PRINZ
SILVER
TCM
TEAC
20714, 20808
20009, 20037,
20170, 20178,
20264, 20412,
20418, 20455,
20512, 20668,
20698, 20712,
21037, 21149,
21755, 21909
20009, 20037
20037, 20668
20250, 20556,
20650
SAKAI
PROFEX
SALORA
20163, 20208,
20361, 20480,
20516, 20548,
20631
SINGER
20009, 20335,
20433, 20435
20773
20516
20037, 20880
20696
20865, 20880,
21318, 21374,
21388
PROFI
PROFITRONIC
20009
SINOTEC
SINUDYNE
SKY
SKYSONIC
SLIDING
20037
SALSA
20335
PROLINE
20037, 20411,
20625, 20634,
21037
20037, 20668,
20714
20009, 20037,
20264, 20418,
20486, 20668,
21037
20178
20037, 20556,
20714
20735
20037, 20374,
20556
SAMBERS
SAMPO
20516
21755
SAMSUNG
20009, 20037,
20060, 20163,
20178, 20208,
20264, 20370,
20482, 20556,
20587, 20618,
20644
TEC
TECH LINE
TECHNICS
PROSONIC
PROTECH
SLX
20668
SMARAGD
20487
SOEMTRON 20865, 21298
TECHNISAT 20556
TECHNISSON 20714
TECHNOSONIC
20556
TECHWOOD 21163
TECNIMAGEN 20556
SOLAVOX
20037, 20163,
20361, 20548
20218
PROTON
PROVISION
SANSUI
20037, 20727,
20729, 20861
20009
20088, 20108,
20170, 20208,
20370, 20555,
20704, 20735
20037, 20556
21217
SONAWA
SONIKO
20037
SANTON
SANYO
SONITRON
SONOKO
SONOLOR
20208, 20370
20009, 20037
20163, 20208,
20361, 20548
20009, 20037,
20370
20000, 20037,
20053, 20093,
20145, 20156,
20170, 20250,
20353, 21100,
21505, 21751
PROXIMA
PYE
TEDELEX
TEKNIKA
TELECOR
20009, 20891
20054, 20060
20394
QUADRAL
QUASAR
20218
SONTEC
SONY
TELEFUNKEN 20037, 20074,
20109, 20335,
20009, 20250,
20650, 20865
20037, 20074,
20200, 20327,
20361, 20512,
20668, 21037
20037
SBR
SCEPTRE
20346, 20486,
20498, 20560,
20625, 20714,
20896
QUELLE
SCHAUB LORENZ
20361, 20374,
20486, 20548,
20606, 20714,
21191
TELEFUSION 20037
R-LINE
TELEGAZI
20037
RADIALVA
20218
TELEMAGIC 20735
APPENDIX-x
TELESONIC 20037
UNIVERSUM 20009, 20037,
20074, 20105,
ZANUSSI
ZENITH
20264
20178, 21909
ASA
ASHA
ASUKA
30037, 30081
30240
30037, 30038
TELESTAR
20037, 20556
TELESYSTEM 20876
20170, 20200,
TELETECH
20009, 20037,
20668, 21037
20037
20264, 20327,
20346, 20361,
20370, 20411,
20418, 20473,
20480, 20492,
20512, 20618,
AUDIOSONIC 30278
PVR
ABS
ALIENWARE 31972
CYBERPOWER
31972
AUDIOVOX
AVP
AWA
30037, 30278
30000, 30352
30043
TELEVIEW
TEMPEST
TENNESSEE 20037
31972
20009
BAIRD
30000, 30041,
30104, 30106
TENSAI
20009, 20037,
20105, 20218,
20371, 20374,
20377, 20715,
21037
20631, 20668,
21037, 21163
20037, 20163
20865
DELL
GATEWAY
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
HP
HUSH
IBUYPOWER 31972
JVC
31972
31972
BASIC LINE 30072, 30104,
30278
BEAUMARK 30240
UNIVOX
V2MAX
BEKO
BELL & HOWELL
30104
30278
BLACK DIAMOND
30642
BLACK PANTHER
30278
30104
TENSON
TEVION
20009
V7 VIDEOSEVEN
21376, 21755
V7VIDEOSEVEN
20880
20556, 20668,
20714, 20808,
21037, 21248,
21298
20009, 20218,
20374
31972
31972
BESTAR
VESTEL
20037, 20556,
20668, 21037,
21163
TEXET
31279
31972
LINKSYS
THOMSON
20037, 20109,
20335, 20560,
20625
20035, 20037,
20074, 20109,
20335, 20361,
20512
VICTOR
VIDEOCON
20053, 20653
20508
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
MICROSOFT 31972
BLAUPUNKT 30034, 30081,
30162, 30226
VIDEOLOGIC 20218
VIDEOLOGIQUE
20218
VIDIKRON
VIDTECH
VIEWPIA
BLUE SKY
30037, 30072,
30278, 30348,
30352, 30480,
30642
THORN
MIND
31972
NIVEUS MEDIA31972
NORTHGATE 31972
PANASONIC 31244, 31807,
31808, 31809
20054, 20735
20178
20876
BONDSTEC 30072
BRANDT 30041, 30206,
30320, 30321
BRANDT ELECTRONIQUE
30041
TINY
TINY DIGITAL20660
TMK
TOKAI
21269
VIEWSONIC 20797, 21755
PHILIPS
SONY
STACK 9
31340
31636, 31972
31972
20178
VIORE
VISION
VIZIO
21207
20037
21756
20163, 20178,
20418
20037, 20109,
20163, 20418,
20443, 20668,
21037
20000, 20054,
20060, 20156,
20178
20009, 20037,
20218, 20394,
20668, 21037
20156
20009, 20037,
20163, 20374,
20668, 21037
21037
20035
20218
SYSTEMAX 31972
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
BRINKMANN 30348
BROKSONIC 30348
VOXSON
TOKAIDO
TOKYO
TOMASHI
TONGTEL
TOSHIBA
BUSH
30000, 30072,
30081, 30278,
30315, 30348,
30352, 30642
30037
WALTHAM
TOSHIBA
30828, 31008,
31972
31972
20780
TOUCH
20035, 20060,
20109, 20156,
20195, 20241,
20508, 20618,
20650, 20714,
20736, 21163,
21164, 21704
VIEWSONIC 31972
CALIX
WARDS
VOODOO
ZT GROUP
31972
31972
CARREFOUR 30045
CARVER
CASIO
CATHAY
CCE
30081
30000
30278
30072, 30278
30000
WATSON
VCR
ABS
ACCENT
ADMIRAL
31972
30072
30048
CGE
TRANS CONTINENS
20037, 20668,
WAYCON
WEGA
CIMLINE
CITIZEN
30072
30037, 30278
20037
21037
TRANS-CONTINENTS
WELLTECH 20714
WESTINGHOUSE
20890
ADVENTURA 30000
CLATRONIC 30000, 30072
COLT 30072
COMBITECH 30352
ADYSON
AIKO
30072
30278
20865, 21374
TRANSONIC 20009, 20037,
20587, 20698,
WHARFEDALE
AIWA
30000, 30032,
30037, 30307,
30348, 30352
30041, 30106,
30240, 30315,
30348, 30352,
30642
CONDOR
CRAIG
30278
30037, 30072,
30240
30037, 30072,
30278, 30480
20037, 20556
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
20037, 21909
20712
TRIDENT
TRISTAR
TRIUMPH
20516
20218
20346, 20516,
20556
AKAI
CROWN
WINDSOR
21037
WINDY SAM 20556
WORLD-OF-VISION
CURTIS MATHES
30041, 30162
TVTEXT 95
UHER
20556
20865, 20877,
20880, 20890,
21298
21191
20634
20860
21196, 21217,
21243
20037
21340
20650, 20769,
20797, 21405,
21406, 21407,
21576
20455
20250
20037
20009, 20037,
20218, 20264
AKIBA
AKURA
ALBA
30072
30072
30000, 30072,
30081, 30278,
30315, 30348,
30352
CYBERNEX 30240
CYBERPOWER31972
20037, 20374,
20418, 20480,
20486
CYRUS
30081
X-VIEW
XENIUS
XLOGIC
XORO
DAEWOO
30045, 30278,
30352, 30637,
30642
ULTRAVOX
UNIC LINE
UNITED
20037
20037, 20455
20037, 20714,
20715, 21037
ALIENWARE 31972
ALLSTAR 30081
AMERICA ACTION
30278
DANSAI
DANTAX
DE GRAAF
30072, 30278
30352
30042, 30048,
30081, 30104,
30166
UNIVERSAL 20037
XRYPTON
YAMADA
YAMAHA
AMSTRAD
30000, 30072,
30278
30037, 30162,
30226, 30240
DECCA
30000, 30067,
30081, 30352
30278
ANAM
DEITRON
DELL
YAMISHI
YAPSHE
YOKAN
YOKO
ANAM NATIONAL
30162, 30226
ANITECH
ANSONIC
ARISTONA
31972
DENKO
DENON
DIAMANT
30072
30042
30037
30072
30000
30081
APPENDIX-xi
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
30642
GRUNDIG
HANIMEX
HANSEATIC 30037, 30038,
30081
HARLEY DAVIDSON
30000
HARMAN/KARDON
30038, 30081
HARWOOD
HCM
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HINARI
30034, 30072,
30081, 30226,
30320, 30347,
30348, 30352
30352
LG
30037, 30480
30348
31972
NIKKO
NIKON
NIVEUS MEDIA
31972
NOBLEX
NOKIA
30037
30034
LIFETEC
LINKSYS
LLOYD'S
LOEWE
DIGITOR
DSE
30642
30642
30000
DUAL
30000, 30041,
30081, 30278,
30348
30037, 30081,
30162, 31562
30072, 30106,
30240
30240
30041, 30042,
30048, 30081,
30104, 30106,
30240, 30278,
30315
LOGIK
DUMONT
30000, 30081,
30104
LUX MAY
LUXOR
30072
DYNATECH 30000
30043, 30048,
30104, 30106,
30315
ELBE
ELCATECH
30038, 30278
30072
NORDMENDE 30041, 30067,
30320, 30321
NORTHGATE 31972
30072
30072
ELECTROHOME
30037
ELECTROPHONIC
30037
LXI
30037
M ELECTRONIC
30000, 30038
MAGNASONIC30278
MAGNAVOX 30000, 30081,
30642
MAGNIN
MAGNUM
MANESTH
OCEANIC
30000, 30041,
30048, 30081,
30104, 30106
30072, 30278,
30315, 30348
30226
30041, 30072,
30240, 30278,
30352
30352
30045
30000, 30037,
30041, 30042,
30081, 30166,
30240
ELIN
30240
OKANO
ELSAY
ELTA
EMEREX
EMERSON
30072
30072, 30278
30032
30000, 30037,
30043, 30045,
30072, 30278,
30637
HISAWA
HISCHITO
HITACHI
30240
30642
OLYMPUS
ONIMAX
OPTIMUS
30642
30045, 30072,
30081
30038, 30081
30000, 30278
30037
30642
30278
30240, 30348,
30352
30037, 30048,
30104, 30162
30072
30348, 30352
30000, 30037,
30072
MARANTZ
MARK
MARTA
MASTEC
MASTER'S
MATSUI
ORBIT
ORION
OSAKI
ESC
30240, 30278
HOEHER
30278, 30642
FERGUSON 30000, 30041,
30278, 30320,
HORNYPHON 30081
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
OSUME
OTTO VERSAND
30081
PACE
PACIFIC
30072
30321
FIDELITY
30000, 30072,
30240, 30352
HP
31972
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
30042
HUSH
MATSUSHITA 30162, 30226
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
30352
30000, 30348,
30642
FINLANDIA 30000, 30037,
30042, 30043,
31972
30048, 30081,
30104, 30106,
30166, 30226
30000, 30042,
30081, 30104
30037, 30043,
30045, 30072,
30278, 30348,
30480
30104
30348
30072
30033
30000, 30045
30000
30278
30000
31972
HYPSON
30000, 30037,
30072, 30278,
30480
MEDION
30348, 30352,
30642
PACKARD BELL
31972
PALLADIUM 30037, 30041,
30072, 30348
MELECTRONIC
30000, 30037,
FINLUX
IBUYPOWER 31972
IMPERIAL 30000
INGERSOLL 30240
INNO HIT
INTERBUY
INTERFUNK 30081, 30104
INTERNAL 30278, 30637
INTERNATIONAL
30037, 30278,
30038
PALSONIC
30000, 30072,
30642
FIRSTLINE
MEMOREX
30000, 30037,
30048, 30104,
30162, 30240,
30307, 30348
30072
30072
30072
PANASONIC 30162, 30226,
30836, 31244,
31562, 31807,
31808, 31809
PATHE CINEMA
30043
FISHER
FLINT
FRONTECH
FUJI
FUJITSU
FUNAI
GALAXIS
GARRARD
GATEWAY
GE
MEMPHIS
METRONIC
METZ
30081
30037, 30081,
30162, 30226,
30347, 30836,
31562
30642
PATHE MARCONI
30041
INTERVISION 30000, 30278
IRRADIO
ITT
30072, 30081
30041, 30104,
30106, 30240
30037, 30278
30278
30041
30348, 30352
30000
PENNEY
30037, 30038,
30042, 30240
30042
30000
30038, 30072
30081
30278
30081
30037
MGA
30043, 30240
MGN TECHNOLOGY
30240
MICORMAY 30348
MICROSOFT 31972
MIND
MINOLTA
PENTAX
PERDIO
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHOENIX
PHONOLA
PILOT
ITV
JBL
JENSEN
JMB
JOYCE
JVC
30048, 30240,
30320
30081
GEC
GENERAL
31972
30042
30045
GENERAL TECHNIC
30348
30041, 30067,
30206, 31008,
31279
MITSUBISHI 30043, 30048,
30067, 30081,
PIONEER
30042, 30067,
30081, 30162
GENEXXA
GOLDHAND 30072
GOLDSTAR 30037, 30038,
30480
30104
30480, 30642
KAISUI
KAMBROOK 30037
KARCHER
30072
MOTOROLA 30048
MTC
MULTITEC
POLK AUDIO 30081
PORTLAND 30278, 30637
30000, 30240
30037
30081, 30278,
PRINZ
30000
GOODMANS 30000, 30037,
30072, 30081,
30642
MULTITECH 30000, 30072
PROFITRONIC
KEC
KENDO
30037, 30278
30072, 30106,
30278, 30315,
30348, 30642
30038, 30041,
30067
MURPHY
MYRYAD
NAD
30000
30081
30104
30081, 30240
30000, 30278,
30320, 30642
30278
30072
30081
30278, 30348,
30352, 30637,
30642
PROLINE
NAIKO
NATIONAL
30348, 30642
30226
PROSONIC
PROTEC
PROTECH
GPX
30037
KENWOOD
GRADIENTE 30000
NEBULA ELECTRONICS
30033
GRAETZ
30041, 30104,
KLH
30072
PROVISION 30278
30240
KNEISSEL
30037, 30278,
30348, 30352
30037
30072
30072
NEC
30037, 30038,
30041, 30067,
30104, 30278
PYE
30081
30162, 30278
30081
30037, 30048
30081
GRANADA
30000, 30037,
30042, 30048,
30081, 30104,
30226, 30240
30000, 30037,
30072, 30278
QUASAR
QUELLE
RADIALVA
RADIOLA
RADIONETTE 30037
RADIOSHACK 30000, 30037
KODAK
KORPEL
KYOTO
LENCO
LEYCO
NECKERMANN
30081
NESCO
NIKKAI
GRANDIN
30278
30072
30072
30072, 30278
APPENDIX-xii
RADIX
RANDEX
RANK ARENA 30041
RCA
30037
30037
STACK 9
STERN
STS
SUNKAI
SUNSTAR
SUNTRONIC 30000
SUNWOOD
SUPRA
31972
30278
30042
30278, 30348
30000
VECTOR RESEARCH
30038
BASE
BASIC LINE 40713
BAZE
BBK
BEL CANTO DESIGN
41571
BELLAGIO
BLACK DIAMOND
40713, 40766,
41451
VICTOR
30041, 30067
40898, 41165
40862
30042, 30048,
30106, 30240,
30320
30000, 30037,
30048, 30104
30348
VIDEO CONCEPTS
30045
VIDEO TECHNIC
30000
VIDEOMAGIC 30037
VIDEOSONIC 30240
VIEWSONIC 31972
REALISTIC
30072
30037
30000, 30043,
30081
41004
REOC
REX
RFT
RICAVISION 31972
RICOH
SYLVANIA
30041
30072
40833
SYMPHONIC 30000
SYSTEMAX 31972
T+A
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
TANDBERG 30278
VILLAIN
VOODOO
WARDS
30000
31972
BLUE PARADE40571
BLUE SKY
40651, 40672,
30034
30162
30000, 30033,
30038, 30042,
30045, 30048,
30072, 30081,
30240
40695, 40713,
40804, 40843
41004
ROADSTAR
30037, 30072,
30081, 30240,
30278
BOGHE
BOMAN
BRAINWAVE 40770, 41115
BRANDT 40503, 40651
BROKSONIC 40695
BUSH 40516, 40672,
40898
ROYAL
SABA
30072
TANDY
TASHIKO
30000, 30104
30041, 30206,
30278, 30320,
30321
30348
30043, 30104,
30106
30045, 30240
30048
30000, 30041,
30067, 30072,
30106
30048, 30067,
30104, 30240
30240, 30278,
30352
30000, 30037,
30048, 30081,
30240
30000, 30041,
30043, 30048,
30081, 30348,
30352
30348
30348
30000, 30037,
30041, 30278,
30307, 30637,
30642
WATSON
30081, 30352,
30642
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
30072, 30278,
SAISHO
SALORA
TATUNG
40695, 40713,
40730, 40831,
40833, 40879,
41128, 41165
30637
WORLD
XR-1000
YAMAHA
YAMISHI
YOKAN
YOKO
30348
30000, 30072
30038
30072, 30278
30072
30037, 30240
30000, 30033,
30034, 30637
31972
SAMSUNG
SANKY
SANSUI
TCHIBO
TCM
TEAC
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
41109
CCE
CELESTIAL 41020
CENTREX
CENTRUM
40730
SANYO
SAVILLE
SBR
ZENITH
40672, 41004
40713, 40779,
41005
40751, 41115
40831, 40841
40713
TEC
TECH LINE
TECHNICS
30072
30072
30081, 30162,
30226
30642
ZT GROUP
ZX
30348, 30352
CGV
CINEA
CINETEC
CINEVISION 40833, 40869,
41483
CLASSIC
30081
SCHAUB LORENZ
30000, 30041,
DVD PLAYER
TEDELEX
TEKNIKA
TELEAVIA
30104, 30106,
30315, 30348
30000, 30037
30041
3D LAB
40539
A-TREND
40714
40730
SCHNEIDER 30000, 30037,
30042, 30072,
TELEFUNKEN 30041, 30206,
30278, 30320,
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
40713, 40730,
CLATRONIC 40672, 40788,
40818, 41165
30081, 30240,
30278, 30348,
30352, 30642
30321, 30642
30226
30000, 30072,
30278
30072
30000, 30072,
30278
30348, 30642
30278
41450
40770, 40788,
40790
40672, 41005,
41107
40533, 40641
40766, 40770,
40788, 40790,
40898, 41115,
41233
CLAYTON
COBY
40713
TELERENT
TELETECH
AEG
40730, 40852,
41107, 41165
41233
SCOTT
SEARS
30043, 30045
30000, 30037,
30042, 30104
30278
30072, 30081,
30240, 30278,
30637, 30642
30081
30037, 30041
30045
30072
30037, 30048
30072, 30104
30037
AIRIS
CODEX
COMPACKS 41107, 41265
CONIA 40852
CONTINENTAL EDISON
40831
CRAIG
CROWN
CRYPTO
CYBERCOM 40831
CYBERHOME 40714, 40816,
41023
CYTRON
D-VISION
DAENYX
DAEWOO
TENOSAL
TENSAI
AIWA
AKAI
SEAWAY
SEG
TEVION
TEXET
THOMAS
THOMSON
40831
40770, 41115
41228
30000
SEI
SELECO
SEMP
SENTRA
SHARP
SHINTOM
SHIVAKI
SHOGUN
SIEMENS
30041, 30067,
30278, 30320,
30321
30037, 30041,
30104
30240
30037, 30072
30348
30041, 30042,
30043, 30045,
30081, 30352,
30828, 31008,
31972
AKI
AKURA
41005
40898, 41140,
41170, 41233,
41367
40539, 40672,
40695, 40713,
40730, 41140
40790
41151
41451
40869
40770, 40850
40852
THORN
ALBA
40651
41115
40872
40705, 40714,
40770, 40833,
40869, 40872
TMK
TOKAI
TOPLINE
TOSHIBA
30240
ALCO
ALIZE
ALL-TEL
ALLEGRO
AMITECH
AMOI
30037, 30081,
30104, 30320,
30347
30081
30037
DAEWOO INTERNATIONAL
40872
DALTON
DANSAI
DANTAX
SIERA
SILVA
SILVER
SINGER
SINUDYNE
SMARAGD
41036, 41107
40770, 41115
40539, 40713,
40723, 40790
40872, 41005
40872
30278
TOTEVISION 30037, 30240
AMPHION MEDIA WORKS
40872
30045, 30072
30081, 30352
30348
TOUCH
31972
30072
30081
30240
30278
30240
30348
TOWADA
TRADEX
UHER
ULTRAVOX
UNITECH
UNITED
AMSTRAD
AMW
ANSONIC
40713
40872
40759, 40831
DAYTEK
DAYTON
DCE
DECCA
DENON
SONNECLAIR 30072
SONTEC
SONWA
SONY
30037
30642
30000, 30032,
30033, 30034,
30106, 31032,
31636, 31972
APEX DIGITAL40672, 41004,
41020, 41833
40818
AUDIOSONIC 41265
40831
40770, 41115
40490, 40634,
41282, 41634
40788, 40898,
41107, 41165,
41450
ARIANET
UNIVERSUM 30000, 30037,
30081, 30104,
AUDIOVOX
AUVIO
AVIOUS
AXION
40790
40843, 41090
41165
DENVER
DESAY
30106, 30240,
30348
30045
SOUNDWAVE 30037, 30348
SSANGYONG 30072
VECTOR
40730
40843, 41090
APPENDIX-xiii
DIAMOND
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
40833, 41483
DIGATRON
DIGIHOME
DIGITOR
DIGITREX
DIK
40651, 40768
HARMAN/KARDON
40702
MATSUI
40651, 40672,
40695, 40713,
41004
40713, 40872
40730
40713
40770
40630, 40651,
40831, 40879,
41107, 41345
40790
PIONEER
40525, 40571,
41571
41265
40850, 41090
41020
HCM
40788
PLAYGO
PLU2
POLAROID
POLK AUDIO 40539
PORTLAND 40770
POWERPOINT 40872
PRIMA
PRIMA ELECTRONIC
40766
41009
40713
41005
40672
40831
40788
40675
40705
HDT
40705
MAXIM
MBO
MDS
MECOTEK
MEDION
HENSS
HIMAX
HITACHI
40713
40843
40573, 40664,
40713
DINAMIC
DISNEY
DIVIDO
HITEKER
HOEHER
40672
40651, 40713,
40831
40766
MEI
DK DIGITAL 40831
HOME ELECTRONICS
40730
HOME TECH INDUSTRIES
41107, 41451
MEMOREX
METZ
40695, 40831
40525, 40571,
40713
40723, 40751,
41223
PRINZ
PRISM
PRO2
40831
DMTECH
DRAGON
DREAMX
DSE
41271
40831
41151
40833, 41483
40651, 40665,
40713, 40730,
40779, 40790,
40831
40705, 41006
41107, 41345
40651, 40672,
40833, 41004
40522
MICO
PROLINE
HOYO
40665
DUAL
HYUNDAI
40766, 40850,
41228
MICROBOSS 40718
MICROMEDIA 40503, 40539
MICROMEGA 40539
MICROSOFT 40522
MICROSTAR 40831
PROSCAN
PROSON
QWESTAR
RADIONETTE 40741, 40869
RAITE
RCA
40713
40651
INGELEN
INTEGRA
ISP
40788
40627
40695
DURABRAND 40713, 40831
EASY HOME 40857
40665
40522, 40571,
40790
40490, 40766
40759, 40763,
40770, 40788,
40898, 41107,
41345
JATON
JBL
40665
40702
MINAX
40713
40705
40770
41165
40879
ECC
40730
MINERVA
MINOKA
MINOWA
MIRROR
ECLIPSE
ELFUNK
ELIN
40723, 40751
40850
40770
JDB
40730
REC
RED STAR
JDV
41367
JMB
40695
ELLION
ELTA
40850
JVC
40503, 40539,
40558, 40623,
40867
MITSUBISHI 40713, 41521
40672, 40770,
40788, 40850,
41115, 41151
40766
MIZUDA
MONYKA
MPX
MTLOGIC
MUSTEK
MX ONDA
40770, 40818
40665
40843
41265
40730
40651, 40751,
41223
40741
40770, 41004,
41367
40785, 40869
41271
40665
40770, 40831,
41197
40872, 41107,
41265
REDSTAR
REOC
REVOY
RIO
40763, 40898
40768
40841
KANSAI
41107
ELTAX
KANSAS TECHNOLOGIES
41233
EMERSON
40591, 40675,
40705
40869
KAWASAKI
KENDO
KENNEX
40790
ROADSTAR
40713, 40730,
40818, 40833,
40879, 40898,
41006
ENTERPRISE 40591
40713, 40831
40713, 40770,
40898
ENZER
41228
NAD
NAIKO
EUROLINE
40788, 41115,
41233
KENWOOD
KIIRO
40490, 40534
40770
RONIN
ROTEL
ROWA
40872
FENNER
40651
NEC
40558, 40623
40516, 40872,
41004
40651
40759, 40831,
41367
FERGUSON 40651, 40898
KINGAVON
KISS
40818
40665, 40841,
41523
NEOVIA
NEUFUNK
NEVIR
FINLUX
40591, 40672,
40741, 40751,
40770, 41165
40713, 40843,
40869
SABA
SAIVOD
KLH
KOSS
40790, 41020
40651
FIRSTLINE
NORCENT
KXD
40857
SALORA
40741
FISHER
FUNAI
FUSION
GE
GLOBAL SOLUTIONS
40768
40670
40675, 40695
40862
LAWSON
LENCO
40768
NORDMENDE 40831
SAMSUNG
40490, 40573,
40744, 41075
40695, 40751,
40768
40651, 40713,
40770, 41165
40768
40591, 40741,
40790, 40801,
40869
40651, 40831
40768
41058
40713
40511, 40539,
40741
40705
41367
NU-TEC
OLIDATA
ONKYO
41228
40672
40503, 40627,
40792
SANSUI
40522
LEXIA
LG
SANTOSH
SANYO
41115
OPTIM
OPTIMUS
ORAVA
ORBIT
40843
40525
40818
40872
40670, 40695,
40713, 40873
40705, 40850
GO VIDEO
40741, 40744,
40833, 40869,
41075, 41483
40591, 40741
LIFETEC
LIMIT
LITEON
LODOS
LOEWE
SCAN
SCANMAGIC 40730
SCHAUB LORENZ
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS 40651, 40713,
40723, 40730,
ORION
40695, 41006,
41128, 41233
40651
40770, 40788,
ORITRON
ORMOND
P&B
41115, 41151
SCHNEIDER 40539, 40651,
40705, 40713,
40790, 40833,
40879, 41004,
41140
40665
40713
LOGIX
LUKER
LUMATRON 40695, 40705,
40741, 40833,
40818, 41451
40695, 40713,
40759, 40768,
40790, 40804,
40831
PACIFIC
40779, 40788,
40790, 40804,
40831
GRAETZ
GRAN PRIX 40831, 40898
GRANDIN
GRUNDIG
40713, 41233
40539, 40651,
40670, 40695,
40705, 40713,
40775, 40790,
41004, 41036,
41128
41115
SCIENTIFIC LABS
40768
SCOTT
LUNATRON 40741
LUXMAN
LUXOR
MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539,
40675, 40713,
PACKARD BELL
40831
PALLADIUM 40695, 40779
PALSONIC 40672, 40852
PANASONIC 40490, 41282
PARAMOUNT PICTURES
40779
40573
40713, 41004
40651, 40672,
40718, 41005,
41036, 41233
40665, 40713,
40763, 40768,
40872
40672
40630, 40675,
40713, 41256
SEG
41140
40723, 41165
41107
GRUNKEL
H & B
40770
MAGNEX
MAJESTIC
MANHATTAN 40705, 40713
MARANTZ
MARK
40818, 40841,
40850, 41233
40713, 40818,
40841, 40850,
41233
PEEKTON
PHILCO
PHILIPS
40898
40788
40503, 40539,
40675
SHANGHAI
SHARP
H&B
40539
40713
SHERWOOD 40741, 40770
SHINSONIC 40533
MARQUANT 40770
PHILO
41345
HANSEATIC 40741, 40790
PHONOTREND41165
SILVA
40788, 40898
APPENDIX-xiv
SILVA SCHNEIDER
40831, 40898
UPTEK
UPXUS
40763
41345
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
51730
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
60625
SINGER
SKANTIC
40751
40539, 40713
URBAN CONCEPTS
40503
DIGITREX
DSE
51056
51730
CARVER
60157, 60179,
60299
SKYMASTER 40730, 40768
SKYWORTH 40766, 40898
VENTURER 40790
ELTAX
FUNAI
GATEWAY
GO VIDEO
51321
50675
51158
50741, 51158,
51730
51235, 51421
51664
51164, 51275
51421
CCE
60643
60393
60157
60003, 60034,
60626
VESTEL
VIETA
40713
40705, 41265
COPLAND
CYRUS
DENON
SLIDING
SM ELECTRONIC
40730, 40768
41115
VIEWMASTER40862
VOXSON
VTREK
WAITEC
WELKIN
40730, 40831
SMART
40705, 40713,
40718
41228
41151
40831
H & B
HITACHI
JVC
KREISEN
LG
DKK
60000
DMX ELECTRONICS
60157
DUAL
ECLIPSE
EROICA
FIDELITY
FISHER
GARRARD
GEMINI
GENEXXA
SONIC BLUE 40869
SONY 40533, 40573,
WELLINGTON40713
60003
60625
60481
60625
60179
60393, 60643
60625
40772, 40864,
41033, 41633
SOUND COLOR
41233
SOUNDMASTER
40768
WELTSTAR
40713
50741
WHARFEDALE
LITEON
51158, 51416,
51440, 51456
50741
40751, 40790
40831, 41233
40713
WILSON
WINDSOR
LOEWE
MAGNAVOX 50646
MEDION
MICO
MITSUBISHI 51403
WINDY SAM 40573
51347
51221
STANDARD 40651, 40768,
40788, 40831,
WOXTER
XBOX
41005, 41151
40522
60032, 60426
GOLDMUND 60157
40898
XENIUS
XLOGIC
XMS
XORO
YAKUMO
YAMADA
40790
40768
40770
41183
41004
40872, 41004,
41151
40490, 40539,
41282, 41543
MUSTEK
NEC
PANASONIC 50490, 51010,
51011
51730
51404
GOLDSTAR 60643
GOODMANS 60362, 60625
STARLOGIC 41005
STARMEDIA 40818, 41005
GRUNDIG
GTX
60157
60362
STEVISON
STRONG
SUNKAI
SUNSTECH
SUNWOOD
41367
40713
40770, 40850
40831
40788, 40898
PHILIPS
50646, 51158,
51818
50631, 51475,
51476
HARMAN/KARDON
60157, 60173,
PIONEER
60426
YAMAHA
HCM
60625
SUPERVISION 40768
RCA
50522
HIRO
60625
SVA
SYLVANIA
40672
40675
YAMAKAWA 40665, 40872
RELISYS
SAMSUNG
SENSORY SCIENCE51158
51347
50490
HITACHI
INTEGRA
KENWOOD
60032
60101
60028, 60157,
60190, 60626
60157
60018
60157
71208
60157
YUKAI
40730
SYMPHONIC 40675
SYNN 40768
TANDBERG 40713
TATUNG
TEAC
ZENITH
40503, 40591,
40741, 40869
41265
SHARP
50630, 50675,
51419, 51550,
51556
ZENNOX
ZOECE
KRELL
KYOCERA
LINN
LG
LOEWE
LUXMAN
40770
41265
40516, 40571,
40695, 40741,
40759, 40768,
40790, 40809,
40833, 41006,
41197, 41483
40898
40490
40770, 40831,
41115, 41165
SINUDYNE
SONY
51221
51033, 51069,
51070, 51433
50675
51321
51227
LD PLAYER
AIWA
40203
SYLVANIA
TANGENT
TEVION
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
VICTOR
60093
CARVER
DENON
FUNAI
40064, 40194
40059
40203
MAGNAVOX 60157
MARANTZ
60029, 60157,
60626
60157, 60643
60029
60032
TEC
TECHNICS
TECHNIKA
50551
51510
HARMAN/KARDON
40194
MATSUI
MCS
MEMOREX
MERIDIAN
MICROMEGA 60157
MIRO
51275
HITACHI
KENWOOD
40395
40258
XORO
YAMADA
51221
51056, 51158,
51416
51544
50741
TECHNISSON 41115
TECHNOSONIC
40730, 41115
TECHWOOD 40713
60157
MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217
MARANTZ 40064, 40194
MITSUBISHI 40059
YAMAHA
ZENITH
60000
60157
MISSION
TEDELEX
TELETECH
TENSAI
41228
NAD
NAGSMI
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC 40204
PHILIPS
PIONEER
POLK AUDIO 40194
QUASAR
REALISTIC
SALORA
SHARP
40059
40059
40059
MITSUBISHI 60156
MTC 60625
MUSICAL FIDELITY
60393
40713, 40768
40651, 40770
40651, 40833,
40898, 41036,
41170, 41382
CD PLAYER
TEVION
ADC
60018
40064, 40194
40059
ADCOM
60234
MYRYAD
NAD
60157
60000, 60299,
60721
ADVANTAGE 60032
THETA DIGITAL
40571
THOMSON
TOKAI
AIWA
AKAI
60157
60156, 60362,
60643
40204
40203
40064
40001
40193, 40201
40204
NAGAOKA
NAIM
60018
60157
40522
40665, 40788,
40790, 40898
41450
ALTO
60625
NAKAMICHI 60147
ANAM
60362
NEC
60234
TOM-TEC
TOSHIBA
SONY
TECHNICS
ARCAM
ARISTON
60157
60625
NIKKO
NSM
60362, 60625
60157
40503, 40695
TRANS-CONTINENTS
40831, 40872,
TELEFUNKEN 40059
THETA DIGITAL
40194
AUDIO DYNAMICS
60018
AUDIO RESEARCH
60157
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
60101, 61327
60000, 60032,
60179, 60426
60393
41165, 41327
40804, 40843
TREDEX
VICTOR
WARDS
YAMAHA
40245
40059
40217
ORION
TRUVISION 40857
AUDIOLAB
60157
PANASONIC 60029, 60303
PHILIPS 60157, 60626
PINK TRIANGLE
60625
60032, 60101
POLK AUDIO 60157
UMAX
41151
AUDIOMECA 60157
UNITED
40672, 40695,
40788, 41115,
41165, 41228
AUDIOTON
BUSH
CAIRN
60157
60643
60157
DVD RECORDER
APEX DIGITAL51056
PIONEER
UNIVERSUM 40591, 40713,
40741, 40779,
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
60029, 60303
CAMBRIDGE 60157, 60625
BOGHE
DENON
51221
50490
PROTON
QED
60157
60157
40790, 40869
APPENDIX-xv
QUAD
QUASAR
RADIOLA
RADIOTONE 60625
RCA
REALISTIC
RESTEK
REVOX
ROTEL
SAE
60157
60029
60157
MUSICAL FIDELITY
80445
TAPE DECK
AIWA
70029, 70197
MYRYAD
NAD
NIKKO
ONKYO
80189
80320, 80609
80609
AKAI
70189, 70283
70076
70029
70076
70189
60032, 60179
60179
60157
60157
60157, 60897
60157
ARCAM
CARVER
DENON
EROICA
GARRARD
GRUNDIG
80103, 80119
PANASONIC 80309, 80518
PHILIPS
PIONEER
80189
80014
70308, 70309
70029
POLK AUDIO 80189
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SEG
60524
60157, 60625
60179
60625
60034
HARMAN/KARDON
70029
RADIOLA
RESTEK
REVOX
SANSUI
SHERWOOD 80066
80189
80189
80140, 80189
80189, 80609
INKEL
70070
JVC
KENWOOD
70244, 70273
70070, 70205
SHARP
SHERWOOD 60426
MAGNAVOX 70029
MARANTZ 70029
MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283
SIEMENS
SONIC
SONY
80609
80281
80158
SIEMENS
60157, 60362
60157
SIMAUDIO
SONIC FRONTIERS
60157
MYRYAD
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
ORION
70029
SOUNDWAVE 80609
70135, 70282
70027, 70220
70308, 70309
TEAC
80110, 80609
SONY
STS
60000
60018
TECHNICS
80309, 80518,
81135
SUPERTECH 60625
SYNERGY 60625
TAG MCLAREN
60157
PANASONIC 70229
TECHWOOD 80281, 80609
THORENS 80189
UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281,
80609
PHILIPS
PIONEER
70029, 70229
70027, 70220
POLK AUDIO 70029
TANDY
TEAC
60032
RADIOLA
RCA
REVOX
SANSUI
SHARP
SONY
70029
70027, 70220
70029
VICTOR
WARDS
80074
80014, 80158,
80189
80293, 81908
81916
60362, 60393,
60625, 60643
60029, 60207,
60303
TECHNICS
70029
YAMAHA
70205, 70231
70170, 70243
70283, 70289,
70308, 70309
70229
(TUNER ID1)
(TUNER ID2)
ZENITH
TECHWOOD 60362
THORENS 60157
THULE AUDIO60157
81917
TEAC
80281
TOSHIBA
60299, 60481
TECHNICS
THORENS
VICTOR
WARDS
YAMAHA
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
YAMAHA (iPod)
TRAXDATA 60626
UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362,
60524
70029
70244, 70273
70027, 70029
70097, 70205,
70524
81981
WARDS
60000, 60032,
60157, 60179
60036, 61907
60625
YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982
YAMAHA
YBA
TUNER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
CD RECORDER
81467
DENON
70626, 70766
AIWA
80158, 80189
HHB
JVC
KENWOOD
LG
70192
71294
70626
71208
AKAI
80115, 80609
80281, 80609
80189
ANAM
ARCAM
CAIRN
80189
MARANTZ
NAD
70626
71208
CAMBRIDGE 80189
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
70626
70192, 71087
70420
81455, 81647
80189
80004, 80273
80004
CARVER
DENON
DUAL
SONY
70000
TDK
71208
GARRARD
80281
TEAC
VICTOR
YAMAHA
70420
70072, 71294
70888, 71292
GOLDMUND 80189
GOLDSTAR 80281
GOODMANS 80609
GRADIENTE 80281
GRUNDIG
HARMAN/KARDON
80189, 80281
MD RECORDER
DENON
70873
80110, 80189
KENWOOD
OPTIMUS
PIONEER
SHARP
70681
71063
71063
70861, 71684
70490
INKEL
JBL
JVC
KENWOOD
LG
80027, 80066
80110
80074
80027, 80645
80281
SONY
TECHNICS
YAMAHA
71078
70490, 70888,
71909
LINN
LOEWE
MAGNAVOX 80189
80189
80189
MARANTZ
MEMOREX
80189
80014
MICROMEGA 80189
APPENDIX-xvi
© 2006
All rights reserved.
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
WH11800
|
Westcott 1869 User Manual
Sterling Allen Bradley 015 User Manual
Sony XR550VE User Manual
Sony HDR CX100E User Manual
Sony Handycam HDR CX110 User Manual
Sony FS221 User Manual
Sony Bluetooth Headset MDR AS700BT User Manual
Snapper RP217018BVE User Manual
Sears 183.91579 User Manual
Samsung SBH700 User Manual